Cooper SE Electric (2020) - Automotive MINI - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL Cooper SE Electric (2020) MINI

LINK: CONTENT & A-Z MINI ELECTRIC

MINI ELECTRIC

OWNER'S MANUAL.

MINI COOPER SE.

Stylized green tree-shaped object placed on a burlap sack against a plain wall (no text or symbols)

WELCOME TO MINI.

OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI COOPER SE.

Thank you for choosing a MINI.

The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:

Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI.

Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

NOTES

Information....6

QUICK REFERENCE

Entering....16

Set-up and use....19

On the road....23

AT A GLANCE

Cockpit....32

Central Information Display (CID)....36

Voice activation system....44

General settings....48

Owner's Manual media....60

MINI eDRIVE....62

Safety of the high-voltage system....65

CONTROLS

Opening and closing....66

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel....85

Transporting children safely....95

Driving....100

Displays....118

Lights....135

Safety....141

Driving stability control systems....162

Driving comfort.... 167

Climate control....180

Interior equipment....187

Storage compartments....198

Cargo area....201

i DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving....208

Increasing range....212

MOBILITY

Charging the vehicle.... 218

Wheels and tires....227

Engine compartment....243

Coolant....246

Maintenance....248

Replacing components.... 250

Breakdown assistance....256

Care....262

REFERENCE

Technical data.... 268

Appendix....270

Everything from A to Z....272

Information

Using this Owner's Manual

Orientation

The fastest way to find information on a particular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication

The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication can be obtained as a printed book from the service center.

The topics are also discussed in the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Additional sources of information

Service center

A service center will be glad to answer questions at any time.

Internet

Vehicle information and general information on MINI, e.g., on technology, are available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display. Additional information, refer to page 60.

MINI Motorer's Guide app

The app specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The app can be displayed on smartphones and tablets.

MINI Motorer's Guide Web

Driver's Guide Web shows the most suitable information for the selected vehicle. If possible, only equipment and functions that are actually installed in the vehicle will be explained. Driver's Guide Web can be displayed in any current browser.

Symbols and displays

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Symbol Meaning

Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle.

Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Symbol Meaning

"..." Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

...< Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system..

...<< Responses generated by the voice activation system.

Action steps

Action steps to be carried out are presented as a numbered list. The steps must be carried out in the defined order.

1. First action step.
2. Second action step.

Enumerations

Enumerations without mandatory order or alternative possibilities are presented as a list with bullet points.

• First possibility.
• Second possibility.

Symbols on vehicle components

This symbol on a vehicle component indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual.

Warning sign with hazard symbol, warning triangle, open book, and hand icon

The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate that incorrect use of high-voltage equipment or of orange-colored high-voltage

components results in the risk of life-threatening injury from electric shock.

Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates features and functions that are not available in a vehicle, for example because of the selected optional features or the country-specific version.

This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Your dealer's service center is happy to answer any questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to your vehicle.

Status of the Owner's Manual

Basic information

The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

For Your Own Safety

Manufacturer

The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.

Intended use

Heed the following when using the vehicle:

• Owner's Manual.
• Information on the vehicle. Do not remove stickers.
• Technical vehicle data.
• The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the vehicle is driven.
• Vehicle documents and statutory documents.

Warranty

Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration requirements applying in the country of first delivery, also known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing operating conditions and registration requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information on warranty is available from a service center.

Maintenance and repairs

Advanced technology, for instance the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to a MINI dealer's service center. If you choose to use another service facility, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends use of a facility that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair, according to MINI specifications with properly trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's Manual as "another qualified service center or repair shop".

If work is performed improperly, for instance maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent damage and related safety risks.

Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of components, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result in a safety risk.

Parts and accessories

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends the use of parts and accessory products approved by the manufacturer of the MINI.

Approved parts and accessories, and advice on their use and installation are available from a MINI dealer's service center.

MINI parts and accessories were tested by the manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.

The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants genuine MINI parts and accessories.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether each individual product

from another manufacturer can be used with MINI vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific official approval was issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether these products are suitable for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 Warning

For vehicles sold in California, the law requires vehicle manufacturers to provide the following warning:

Warning

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

Warning

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the following warranties:

• New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
  – Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
  – Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
  – Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
  – California Emission Control System Limited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating conditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements.

You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please con-

tact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance

Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for maintenance measures:

• MINI Maintenance system.
  – Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models.
• Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly maintained, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refer to chapter engine oil change regarding recommended service intervals for oil changes.

Data memory

General information

Electronic control devices are installed in the vehicle. Electronic control units process data they receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or exchange with each other. Some control units are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or provide assistance during driving, for instance driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control units facilitate comfort or infotainment functions.

Information about stored or exchanged data can be requested from the manufacturer of the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for example.

Personal reference

Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehicle identification number, license plate and corresponding authorities. In addition, there are other options to track data collected in the vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner, for instance via utilized services.

Operating data in the vehicle

Control units process data to operate the vehicle.

For example, this includes:

• Status messages for the vehicle and its individual components, e.g., wheel rotational speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator.
• Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain sensor signals.

The processed data is only processed in the vehicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not stored beyond the operating period.

Electronic components, e.g. control units and ignition keys, contain components for storing technical information. Information about the vehicle condition, component usage, maintenance requirements events or faults can be stored temporarily or permanently.

This information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system, or the environment, for instance:

• Operating states of system components, for instance, fill levels, tire inflation pressure, battery status.

• Malfunctions and faults in important system components, for instance lights and brakes.

• Responses by the vehicle to special situations such as airbag deployment or engagement of the driving stability control systems.

• Information on vehicle-damaging events.

The data is required to perform the control unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.

The majority of this data is volatile and is only processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small share of the data is stored event-related in event or fault memories.

When servicing, for instance during repairs, service processes, warranty cases, and quality assurance measures, this technical information can be read out from the vehicle together with the vehicle identification number.

A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop can read out the information. The socket for OBD On-board Diagnosis required by law in the vehicle is used to read out the data.

The data is collected, processed, and used by the relevant organizations in the service network. The data documents technical conditions of the vehicle, helps with the identification of the fault, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement.

Furthermore, the manufacturer has product monitoring duties to meet in line with product liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle manufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle. The data from the vehicle can also be used to check customer claims for warranty and guaranty.

Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be reset when a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop performs repair or servicing work.

Data entry and data transfer into the vehicle

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort and individual settings can be stored in the vehicle and modified or reset at any time.

For example, this includes:

• Settings for the seat and steering wheel positions.
  – Suspension and climate control settings.

If necessary, data can be transferred to the entertainment and communication system of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.

This includes the following depending on the respective equipment:

• Multimedia data such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system.
• Address book data for use in conjunction with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system.
• Entered navigation destinations.
• Data on the use of Internet services.

This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is found on a device that has been connected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at any time.

This data is only transmitted to third parties upon personal request as part of the use of online services. The transmission depends on the selected settings for the use of the services.

Incorporation of mobile devices

Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile devices connected to the vehicle, for instance smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle control elements.

The sound and picture from the mobile device can be played back and displayed through the multimedia system. Certain information is transferred to the mobile device at the same time. Depending on the type of incorporation, this includes, for instance position data and other general vehicle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps, for instance navigation or music playback, work.

There is no further interaction between the mobile device and the vehicle, such as active access to vehicle data.

How the data will be processed further is determined by the provider of the particular app being used. The extent of the possible settings depends on the respective app and the operating system of the mobile device.

Services

General information

If the vehicle has a wireless network connection, this enables data to be exchanged between the vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devices brought into the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This wireless network connection enables 'online functions' to be used. These include online services and apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehicle manufacturer

Where online services from the vehicle manufacturer are concerned, the corresponding functions are described in the appropriate place, for instance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's website. The relevant legal information pertaining to data protection is provided there too. Personal data may be used to perform online services. Data is exchanged over a secure connection, for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose.

Any collection, processing, and use of personal data above and beyond that needed to provide the services must always be based on a legal permission, contractual arrangement or consent. It is also possible to activate or deactivate the data connection as a whole. That is, with the exception of functions and services required by law such as Assist systems.

Services from other providers

When using online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the relevant provider and subject to their data privacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged during this process. Information on the way in which personal data is collected and used in relation to services from third parties, the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be obtained from the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

- How various systems in your vehicle were operating.

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened.
• How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data, for instance name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Vehicle identification number

Engine compartment

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular dial and mounting bracket (no visible text or symbols)

The vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Windshield

Close-up of a car's front wheel and side panel, showing no visible text or symbols

The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers

The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone [phone].

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline [phone]. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Entering

Opening and closing

Buttons on the vehicle key

1 2 3 4

1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 Panic mode

Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, either only the driver's door or all vehicle access points are unlocked.

If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.

Buttons for the central locking system

Overview

Close-up of a car dashboard knob showing the number 6 and weight (no text or symbols beyond basic design)

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Pressing the button locks the vehicle if the front doors are closed.

Unlocking

Pressing the button unlocks the vehicle.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Comfort Access

Concept

The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

Unlocking the vehicle

Simple diagram of a pen-like object with an arrow pointing to it, set against a dark gradient background (no text or symbols)

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.

Locking the vehicle

Simple diagram of a pen-like object with an arrow pointing to it, set against a dark gradient background (no text or symbols)

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.

Tailgate

unlocking

Close-up of a car's rear bumper with a white arrow pointing upward (no text or symbols)

- Unlock the vehicle and then press the button on the outside of the tailgate.

- Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked.

Closing

Closing the tailgate manually.

Displays and control elements

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 2 3 4

1 Low beams, fog lights
2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal
3 Instrument cluster
4 Wiper system

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument cluster

The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready state is established.

Driver's door

Diagram of a car interior showing labeled parts with numbered annotations

1 Power windows

2 Exterior mirrors

All around the selector lever

Diagram of a car dashboard control panel with labeled buttons and adjustment knobs

1 Selector lever

2 Controller with buttons

3 Parking brake

Central Information Display (CID)

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

MENU	Press once: calls up the main menu.
	Press twice: open recently used menus.
COM	Opens the Communication menu.
MEDIA	Opens the Media/Radio menu.
NAV	Opens destination input menu for navigation.
MAP	Opens navigation map.
BACK	Opens the previous display.
OPTION	Opens the Options menu.

Voice activation

Activating the voice activation system

1. P is the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the signal.

3. Say the command.

This symbol indicates that the voice activation system is active.

If no other commands are available, operate the function via the Central Information Display (CID).

Terminating the voice activation system

Press the button on the steering wheel or >Cancel.

Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Manually adjustable seats

1 2 3 4

1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt

Adjusting the head restraint

Height

Interior view of a car showing a white object with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols present)

• To raise: push the head restraint up.
• To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 2 3

1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out

Adjusting the steering wheel

In four directions

Close-up of a car interior showing the dashboard and steering wheel with a white arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up.

Entering the rear

1. Pull lever up to the stop.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest seat and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

1. Fold backrest forward.
2. Push the seat forward.

Original position

1. Push the seat back into the original position.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

Infotainment

Radio

Control elements

1 BAND MODE 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 5

1 Changing the waveband
2 Changing the entertainment source
3 Sound output on/off, volume
4 Changing the station/track
5 Programmable memory buttons

Navigation destination entry

Entering a destination via address

State/province

1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. "State/Province?"
4. Select the country from the list.

Entering the address

The address can be entered in any order.

Example: entering the address via the town/city

1. "City/Postal code?"
2. Enter the town/city.
   The list is narrowed down further with each entry.
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select a town/city from the list.
5. If necessary, enter the street.
6. Select the street as you would the town/city.
7. If necessary, enter a house number.
8. Select the symbol.
9. Select a house number or range of house numbers from the list.

Starting destination guidance

"Start guidance"

If only the town/city was entered: destination guidance is started to the town/city center.

Pairing the mobile phone

After the mobile phone is paired once with the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using the Central Information Display

(CID), the steering wheel buttons and spoken instructions.

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display.

1. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used.
2. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's manual: e.g., search for or connect the Bluetooth device or a new device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

1. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

2. Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device. Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.

3. Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

The mobile phone is connected and will appear at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Using the phone

Accepting a call

Incoming call can be accepted via the Central Information Display (CID) or the button on the steering wheel.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

"Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel

Press the button.

Via the instrument cluster

Use the OK button on the steering wheel to select: "Accept"

Dialing a number

1. "Communication"
2. "Dial number"

3. Select the numbers individually.

4. Select the symbol.

Establish the connection via the additional phone:

1. Press the button.

1. "Call via"

Apple CarPlay preparation

Concept

CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and the Central Information Display (CID).

Functional requirements

• Compatible iPhone.
  iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
• Corresponding mobile contract.
• Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice operation are activated on the iPhone.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:

- "Bluetooth®"

- "Apple CarPlay"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.

Select CarPlay as the function:

◀ "Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.

On the road

Driving

Drive-ready state

General information

When drive-ready state is switched on, the vehicle is operational.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time.

Activated drive-ready state is the equivalent of a running engine in conventional vehicles. Deactivated drive-ready state is equivalent to switching the engine off.

To save battery power when parking, switch off drive-ready state and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Drive-ready state is switched off automatically:

• When you lock the vehicle while low beams are switched on.
• If the charge state of the batteries is low.
• When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off.
• While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled with driver's door open and low beams off.

After the driver's door is opened or closed or the driver's safety belt is released, the radio-ready state remains active.

Start/Stop button

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches standby state on or off.

Drive-ready state is switched on when you depress the

brake pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button.

Switching on drive-ready state

1. Close the driver's door.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
   Drive-ready state is switched on.

Displays

READY indicates drive-ready state.

Drive-ready state in detail

Requirements

Driving is possible under the following conditions:

• The high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged.
• The driver's door is closed.
• Charging cable is detached.

Driving away

1. Switch on drive-ready state.

2. Apply the brake and engage the selector lever in position D or R.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive off.

Accelerator pedal positions

1 2 3

1 Deceleration
2 Coasting
3 Acceleration or constant speed: ePO- WER

Engaging the gear

• Interlock: the selector lever position P can be exited only with drive-ready state engaged.
• Shift lock: with the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed.
• Shift lock: before shifting out of P, remove the charging cable from the vehicle; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed.

Engaging N, D, R

Close-up of a car gear shift lever mechanism with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Move the selector lever in the desired direction.

Engaging P

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with a white arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

Apply brake and press button P.

Parking brake

Setting

Pull the switch when the vehicle is stationary.

The LED and indicator light light up.

Releasing

Press the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal, roadside parking light

High beams, headlight flasher

Interior view of a car dashboard with two directional arrows indicating left and right control buttons (no text or symbols)

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

- High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.

- High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Turn signal

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle wheel and dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

- On: press the lever past the resistance point.

- Off: lightly tap the lever to the resistance point.

- Off: press the lever past the resistance point in the opposite direction.

- Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the lever up or down.

- Brief signaling: press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Canada: roadside parking light

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle's seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

- On: with the standby state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

- Off: briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Lights and lighting

Light functions

Symbol Function
	Front fog lights.
	Automatic headlight control.
	Lights off.Daytime running lights.
	Parking lights.
	Low beams.
	Instrument lighting.

Wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and gear shift knob (no visible text or symbols)

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

• Resting position of the wipers: position 0.
• Rain sensor: position 1.
• Normal wiper speed: position 2.
• Fast wiper speed: position 3.

Brief wipe and switching off

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Press the lever down.

• Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position.
• Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating vehicle flow or movement (no text or symbols present)

To activate: press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1.

To deactivate: press the lever back into the standard position.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air vent (no visible text or symbols)

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point.

• Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
• Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

Brief wipe and switching off

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Press the lever down.

• To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
• To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
• Brief wipe: press down once.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

Close-up of a car interior showing a plug inserted into the dashboard with a white arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel, air vent, and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever.

Climate control

Automatic climate control

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

AUTO program.

Recirculated-air mode.

Controls the air flow, manual.

Air distribution, manual.

Defrosts and defogs the windows.

Rear window defroster.

Charging the vehicle

Charging the vehicle

Charging socket flap

Close-up of a car's side panel showing the battery icon and partial door (no text or symbols visible)

The charging socket flap is located on the right side of the vehicle.

Always keep charging socket clean and un-obstructed.

Keep the charging socket flap closed when the charging socket is not used.

Connecting the charging cable

To connect, engage selector lever position P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un-

lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if needed.

1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow. The charging socket flap opens.

Close-up of a car's side panel with a circular button and a white arrow pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)

1. Remove the charging socket lid, arrow.

Close-up of a car's side window with a white arrow pointing to the interior (no visible text or symbols)

1. Remove the cover of the charging cable plug, if needed.

2. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the household socket or Level 2 charging cable to the port on the charging station.

3. Insert the appropriate charging cable plug, and push it in until it engages.

When charging at a charging station, follow the instructions at the charging station.

Removing

When the charging process is active and the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is automatically locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing the cable.

When the charging process is completed, the charging cable is automatically unlocked.

If necessary, clean the area between the charging socket flap and charging socket, for instance from snow, before removing it.

1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key if it is locked.

Charging cable is unlocked.

1. Press the release button on the handle, arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable at the gripping areas.

Charging process is interrupted.

Diagram showing a plug inserted into an electric vehicle charging socket, with numbered arrows indicating direction of charging.

1. Remove the charging cable from the charging socket, arrow 2.

2. Put the charging socket lid back on.

3. Press on the charging socket flap until it engages.

4. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, if needed.

5. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the household socket or Level 2 charging cable from the port on the charging station as applicable.

6. Stow the charging cable.

At a charging station, insert the permanently installed charging cable in the place provided for it.

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure specifications

Close-up of a car's front and side panels showing structural elements (no text or symbols visible)

The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed:

• At least twice a month.
• Before embarking on an extended trip.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Providing assistance

Hazard warning flashers

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

The button is located above the Control Display.

Breakdown assistance

MINI Roadside Assistance

This service can be reached around the clock in many countries.

1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the MINI Roadside Assistance is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Cockpit

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 Power windows 81

2 Exterior mirror operation 92

3 Buttons of the central locking system 71

4 Lights

Front fog lights 138

Light switch 135

Lights off

Daytime running lights 137

Parking lights 135

Low beams 135

Automatic headlight control 136

Cornering light 137

High-beam Assistant 137

Instrument lighting 139

5 Steering wheel buttons, left

Cruise control on/off 167

Cruise control: to store the speed

Pausing, continuing cruise control

Cruise control: increase speed

Cruise control: reduce speed

6 Steering column stalk, left

Turn signal 109

High beams, head-light flasher 109

High-beam Assistant 137

Roadside parking lights 136

Onboard Computer 129

7 Instrument cluster 118

8 Steering column stalk, right

Wipers 109

Wiper on Canadian models 113

Rain sensor 110

Rain sensor on Canadian models 114

Cleaning windows 111

Rear window wiper in Canadian models 112

Rear window wiper 112

Clean the rear window 112

9 Steering wheel buttons, right

Voice activation 44

Telephone

Confirm the selection 128

Move selection up 128

Move selection down 128

Increase volume

Reduce volume

10 Horn, entire surface

11 Adjusting the steering wheel 94

12 Unlocking the hood 244

In the vicinity of the center console

Interior view of a car dashboard with numbered parts for identification and assembly reference.

1 Hazard warning system 256

Intelligent Safety 152

2 Control Display 36

3 Radio/Multimedia

4 Glove compartment 198

5 Climate control 180

6 PDC Park Distance Control 169

Rearview camera 172

Parking assistant 175

Energy recovery 104

Switch drive-ready state on and off 100

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 162

MINI Driving Modes switch 164

7 Transmission selector lever 102

8 Controller with buttons 38

9 Parking brake 107

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 2 SOS PASS AIRBAG OFF 3 6 5 4 3

1 Emergency Request, SOS 257
2 Indicator light, front-seat passenger airbag 144
3 Reading lights 139

4 Ambient light 139
5 Panoramic glass sunroof 82
6 Interior lights 139

Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Input and display

Letters and numbers

Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering upper and lower case letters, numbers and characters:

Symbol Function

abcABC	Change between capital and lower-case letters.
Insert blank space.
Use voice activation.
OK Confirm entry.

Without navigation system

@A Aa select the symbol.

Entry comparison

When entering names and addresses, the choice is narrowed down with every letter entered and letters may be added automatically.

Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle.

- Only those letters are offered during entry for which data is available.

- Destination search: place names can be entered in all languages that are available on the Control Display.

Activating/deactivating the functions

Several menu items are preceded by a checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

√ Function is activated. □ Function is deactivated.

Status information

General information

The status field can be found in the upper area of the Control Display. Status information is displayed in the form of symbols.

Radio

Symbol Meaning

HD) HD Radio station is being received.

sxm Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Signal strength of cellular net- work. Symbol flashes: network search.

Cellular network is not available.

Roaming is active.

SMS text message received.

Message received.

Reminder.

Sending not possible.

Entertainment

Symbol Meaning

Bluetooth audio.

USB audio interface.

☐ Mobile phone audio interface.

Other symbols

Symbol Meaning

⚠️ Check Control message.

The sound output has been switched off.

Encrypted connection not active.

Request for the current vehicle position.

Checking the current vehicle position.

Split screen

General information

Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, for instance information from the Onboard Computer.

In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when switching to another menu.

Switching the split screen on/off

1. Press the button.

2. "Split screen"

Selecting the display

The display can be selected in menus which support the split screen function.

1. Move the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting.

Specifying the number of displays

It is possible to specify the number of displays.

1. Move the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. Move the Controller to the left.

Control elements

Overview

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

1 Control Display with touchscreen
2 Controller with buttons

Control Display

General information

To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions, refer to page 266. In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, for instance due to intense solar radiation, the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, for instance through shade or air conditioning, the normal functions are restored.

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in the area in the front of the Control Display can shift and damage the Control Display. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place objects in the area in front of the Control Display.

Switching on/off automatically

The Control Display is switched on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the Control Display is needed for operation.

In certain situations, the Control Display is switched off automatically, for instance if no operation is performed on the vehicle for several minutes.

Switching on/off manually

The Control Display can also be switched off manually.

1. Press the button.

2. "Turn off control display"

Press the Controller or any button on the Controller to switch it back on again.

Controller with navigation system

General information

The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings.

Operation

- Turn to switch between menu items, for example.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a central hub and circular base (no visible text or symbols)

- Press to select a menu item, for example.

Close-up of a mechanical knob with a downward arrow indicating rotation or adjustment (no text or symbols visible)

- Tilt in four directions to switch between displays, for example.

Mechanical component with four directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

MENU	Press once: calls up the main menu. Press twice: open recently used menus.
COM	Opens the Communication menu.
MEDIA	Opens the Media/Radio menu.
NAV	Opens destination input menu for navigation.
MAP	Opens navigation map.
BACK	Opens the previous display.
OPTION	Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

General information

The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings.

Operation

- Turn to switch between menu items, for example.

Close-up of a mechanical knob with circular motion arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

- Press to select a menu item, for example.

Close-up of a mechanical control knob with a white arrow pointing downward (no text or symbols visible)

- Tilt in two directions to switch between displays, for example.

Close-up of a mechanical control knob with directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

MENU	Press once: calls up the main menu. Press twice: open recently used menus.
COM	Opens the Communication menu.
MEDIA	Opens the Media/Radio menu.
PACK	Opens the previous display.
OPTION	Opens the Options menu.

Operating via the Controller

Opening the main menu

Press the button.

Circular icon set with a car, globe, car, flag, email, and music symbol (no text or numbers)

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

Circular icon set with a car, globe, car, flag, email, and music symbol (no text or numbers)

1. Press the Controller.

Adjusting menu contents

The display of menus "Media/Radio", "Communication" and "MINI Connected" can be adjusted, for instance to remove the entries of functions that are not used from the menu.

Via Central Information Display (CID):

1. Select the menu.
2. "Personalize menu"
3. Select desired menu contents to be displayed.

Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, for instance "System settings", a new display appears.

- Move the Controller to the left.

The current display closes and the previous display is shown.

- Press the button.

The previous display re-opens.

- Move the Controller to the right.

The new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.

Opening recently used menus

The recently used menus can be displayed.

Press the button twice.

Opening the Options menu

Press the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

The menu consists of various areas, for instance:

• "Split screen": screen settings.
• "Media/Radio": control options for the selected main menu.
• "Save station": if applicable, further control options for the selected menu.

Entering letters and numbers

Input

1. Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.
2. OK confirm entry.

Deleting

Symbol Function

← Press the Controller: delete letters or number.

Hold the Controller down: delete all letters or numbers.

Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, the letters for which there is an entry are displayed at the left edge.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.
   All letters for which there are entries are displayed on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
   The first entry of the selected letter is displayed.

Operation via touchscreen

General information

The Control Display is equipped with a touchscreen.

Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not use any objects.

Opening the main menu

Tap on the symbol.

Circular diagram with central car and surrounding icons ( globe, document, phone, music, car, flag) — no readable text or symbols.

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items

Tap the desired menu item.

Circular icon set with a car, globe, car, flag, email, and music symbol (no text or numbers)

Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, a new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.

- Swipe to the left.

- Tap arrow.

The new display opens.

Opening recently used menus

1. Tap on the symbol.
2. tap on the symbol.

Entering letters and numbers

Input

1. Tap the symbol on the touchscreen. A keyboard is displayed on the Control Display.
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.

Deleting

Symbol Function

← Tapping the symbol: deletes the letter or number.
← Tapping and holding the symbol all letters: deletes all letters or numbers.

Operating navigation map

The navigation map can be moved using the touchscreen.

Function Operation

Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the map. fingers.

Programmable memory buttons

General information

The Central Information Display (CID) functions can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly, for instance radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and menu entries.

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Storing a function

1. Select the function via the Central Information Display (CID).

2. Press and hold the desired button, until a signal sounds.

Executing a function

1...6 Press the button. The function will work immediately.

This means, for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

The assignment of the buttons is displayed in the upper area of the Control Display.

Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds.

2. "OK"

Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept

Most functions displayed on the Control Display can be operated by voice commands via the voice activation system. The system supports you with announcements during input.

General information

• Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary can only be operated via the voice activation system to a limited extent.
• The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side.

• ...< in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.

Functional requirements

- A language must be set via the Control Display that is supported by the voice

activation system. To set the language, refer to page 48.

- Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.

Using the voice activation system

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the signal.

3. Say the command.

This symbol indicates that the voice activation system is active.

No other commands may be available. In this case, operate the function via the Central Information Display (CID).

Terminating the voice activation system

Press the button on the steering wheel or >Cancel.

Possible commands

General information

Most menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands.

Commands from other menus can also be spoken.

You can also select list entries such as phone list entries via voice activation. Read

these list entries out loud exactly as they are shown in the respective list.

Displaying possible commands

The following is displayed in the top area of the Control Display:

• Some possible commands for the current menu.
• Some possible commands from other menus.
• Status of the voice recognition.
• Encrypted connection is not available.

Help on the voice activation system

• General information on voice control<: have information on the operating principle of the voice activation system read out loud.
  ->Help<: have help for the current menu read out loud.

Example: opening the tone settings

The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the Controller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, if needed.
2. Play the button on the steering wheel.

3. Media and radio<

4. Tone<

Adjusting

Setting the language

The language to be used for voice activation and system announcements can be set.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. If necessary, "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired language.

Setting the voice dialog

You can set the system to use standard dialog or a short version.

The short version of the voice dialog plays back short messages in abbreviated form.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select the desired setting.

Speaking during voice output

It is possible to answer during inquiries of the voice activation system. The function can be deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably interrupted, for instance due to background noise or conversations in the vehicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"

Activating voice recognition via the server

The voice recognition feature via the server provides a dictation function and a natural method of entering destinations while improving the quality of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is transmitted to a service provider via an encrypted connection and stored locally there.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"

Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume button during the spoken instructions until the desired volume is set.

• The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.
• The volume is stored for the profile currently used.

Information on Emergency Requests

Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a phone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 257, close to the interior mirror.

System limits

• Certain noises can be detected and may lead to problems. Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof closed.
• Noises from the front passenger or the rear seat bench can impair the system. Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
• Major language dialects can cause problems with the voice recognition feature. Speak loud and clear.

Using the voice activation system of the smartphone

A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be used via voice activation.

Activate voice command response on the smartphone for this purpose.

1. P### and hold the button on the steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. Voice command response is activated on the smartphone.
2. Release the button. If activation is successful, a confirmation appears on the Control Display.

If it was not possible to activate voice command response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears on the Control Display.

Amazon Alexa Car Integration

Concept

Alexa is a digital voice-controlled assistant by Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integration, Alexa can be used in the vehicle.

General information

Some of the Alexa functions are limited in the vehicle to prevent any impairment of safety while driving.

Functional requirements

• Connected Voice Services purchased via MINI Connected Store.
• Same MINI Connected account used in the vehicle and in the MINI Connected app.
• Vehicle added in the MINI Connected app.
• Amazon account and MINI account connected in the MINI Connected app.
• Smartphone connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth or USB.

Activation in the MINI Connected app

The Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in the MINI Connected app.

Follow the instructions in the app.

Activation in the vehicle

An authorization for the use of Amazon Alexa Car Integration is required every time before starting a trip.

1. Authorizing Amazon Alexa Car Integration:
2. Connect the smartphone to the vehicle via Bluetooth.

3. Selects appropriate driver profile, refer to page 75.

4. P. the button on the steering wheel.

5. Wait for the signal.

6. Say activation word >Alexa< and desired command.

Information about the active function is displayed on the Control Display.

Malfunction

In case of a malfunction, switch off the drive-ready state and restart again.

General settings

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Language

Setting the language

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. If necessary, "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the voice dialog

For voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page 45.

Time

Setting the time zone

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.

Setting the time format

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Date

Setting the date

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and year.

Setting the date format

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
   The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the units of measurement

You can set the units of measurement for some values, for example, consumption, distances and temperature.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
   The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Activating/deactivating the display of the current vehicle position

Concept

If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current vehicle position can be displayed in the MINI Connected app.

Activating/deactivating

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating popup windows

For some functions, popup windows are displayed automatically on the Control Display. Some of these popup windows can be activated or deactivated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Control Display

Brightness

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Depending on the light conditions, the brightness settings may not be clearly visible.

Screensaver

If no entries are made via the Central Information Display (CID), a screensaver can be displayed after an adjustable time.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Screensaver"

6. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Messages

Concept

The menu centrally displays all messages arriving in the vehicle in list form.

General information

The following messages can be displayed:

• Traffic messages.
• Communication messages, for example e-mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
• Check Control messages.
• Messages on service notifications.
• Messages from the vehicle manufacturer.

Messages are additionally displayed in the status field.

Retrieving messages

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

The menu in which the message is displayed will open.

Deleting messages

All messages, except Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can be deleted from the list.

Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as they are relevant.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
3. Press the button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all notifications"

Adjusting

The following settings can be adjusted:

• Select the applications, from which messages will be permitted.
• Sort the messages according to date or priority.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.

Data protection

Data transfer

Concept

The vehicle offers various functions which require data to be transferred to MINI or a service provider. The data transfer can be deactivated for some functions.

General information

With data transfer deactivated, the respective function cannot be used.

Only make these settings while stationary.

Activating/deactivating

Follow the instructions on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Data privacy"
4. Select the desired setting.

Deleting personal data in the vehicle

Concept

Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores personal data, such as stored radio stations. This personal data can be permanently deleted via the Central Information Display (CID).

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data is deleted:

• Driver profile settings.
• Stored radio stations.
• Stored programmable memory buttons.
• Travel and Onboard Computer information.
• Music hard disk.
• Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
• Phone book.
• Office data, for instance voice notes.
• Login accounts.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes.

Functional requirement

Data can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting data

Note and follow the instructions on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Data privacy"
4. "Delete personal data"
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "OK"
7. Exit and lock the vehicle.

The deletion process takes 15 minutes to complete.

If not all data was deleted, repeat the deletion.

Canceling deletion

Switch on the drive-ready state to cancel deletion of the data.

Connections

Concept

Various connection types are available for using mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection type to select depends on the mobile device and the desired function.

General information

The following overview shows possible functions and the suitable connection types for them. The scope of functions depends on the mobile device.

Function Connec- tion type
Making calls via the hands-free system. Using phone functions via the Central Information Dis-play (CID). Using the smartphone Of- fice functions.	Bluetooth.
Playing music from the smartphone or the audio player.	Bluetooth or USB.
Using compatible apps via the Central Information Dis-play (CID).	Bluetooth or USB.
USB storage device: Exporting and importing driver profiles. Update the software. Playing music.	USB.
Playing videos from the smartphone or the USB de-vice.	USB.
Using Apple CarPlay apps via the Central Information Display (CID) and voice op-eration.	Bluetooth and WLAN.

The following connection types require one-time pairing with the vehicle:

• Bluetooth.
  -AppleCarPlay

Paired devices are automatically recognized later on and connected to the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Compatible devices

General information

Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed or deviating software versions.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number

When looking for compatible devices, you may have to state the vehicle identification number and the software part number. These numbers can be displayed in the vehicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"

A software update, refer to page 58, can be performed.

Bluetooth connection

Functional requirements

- Compatible device, refer to page 53, with Bluetooth interface.

• The vehicle key is in the vehicle.
• The device is ready for operation.
• Bluetooth is activated on the device and in the vehicle, refer to page 53.
• Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may be required on the device; refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Switching on Bluetooth

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"

Activating/deactivating telephone functions

To use all supported functions of a mobile phone, the following functions must be activated prior to pairing.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting:

- "Office"

Activate function to transmit short messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, notes, and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can be incurred by transmitting all data to the vehicle.

- "Contact images"

Activate function to show the contact pictures.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

Pairing the mobile device with the vehicle

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

5. Select the functions for which the device will be used:

6. "Telephone"

7. "Bluetooth® audio"
8. "Apps"
9. "Apple CarPlay"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display.

1. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile device display.

Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

1. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

- Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device.

Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.

- Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

If connection was not successful: Frequently Asked Questions, refer to page 54.

Frequently Asked Questions

All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as expected.

In this case, the following explanations can help:

Why could the mobile phone not be paired or connected?

- There are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone or vehicle.

In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections with other devices.

Delete all known Bluetooth connections from the device list on the mobile phone and start a new device search.

- The mobile phone is in power-save mode or has only a limited remaining battery life.

Charge the mobile phone.

Why does the mobile phone no longer react?

- The applications on the mobile phone do not function anymore.

Switch the mobile phone off and on again.

- Possibly too high or too low ambient temperatures for mobile phone operation.

Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme ambient temperatures.

Why can phone functions not be used via the Central Information Display (CID)?

- The mobile phone may not be properly configured, for instance as Bluetooth audio device.

Connect the mobile phone with the telephone or additional phone function.

Why are no or not all phone book entries displayed or why are they incomplete?

• Transmission of the phone book entries is not yet complete.
• It is possible that only the phone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.
• It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.
• It may not be possible to transmit contacts from social networks.
• The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.
• Data volume of the contact too large, for instance due to stored information such as notes.
  Reduce the data volume of the contact.
• A mobile phone is only connected as an audio source.
  Reconfigure the mobile phone and connect it with the telephone or additional phone function.
  How can the phone connection quality be improved?
• The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone.
• Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter or place it in the area of the center console.
• Insert the mobile phone into the wireless charging tray.
• Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, contact the hotline, a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

USB connection

General information

The following mobile devices can be connected to the USB port:

- Mobile phones.

The snap-in adapter features a separate USB port that is automatically connected when a compatible mobile phone is inserted.

- Audio devices with USB port, for instance MP3 players.

- USB storage devices.

Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats.

A connected USB storage device will be supplied with charge current via the USB port if the device supports this. Follow the maximum charge current of the USB port.

The following uses are possible on USB ports with data transfer:

- Exporting and importing driver profiles, refer to page 75.

- Playing music files via USB audio.

- Playing videos via USB video.

- Loading of software updates, refer to page 58.

Follow the following when connecting:

- Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB port.

- Use a flexible adapter cable.

- Protect the USB storage device against mechanical damage.

- Due to the large number of USB storage devices available on the market, it cannot be guaranteed that every device is operable on the vehicle.

- Do not expose USB storage devices to extreme environmental conditions, such

as very high temperatures; refer to the owner's manual of the device.

• Due to the many different compression techniques, proper playback of the media stored on the USB storage device cannot be guaranteed in all cases.
• To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB storage device via the onboard socket, when it is connected to the USB port.
• Depending on how the USB storage device is being used, settings may be required on the USB storage device, refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Not compatible USB media:

• USB hard drives.
• USB hubs.
• USB memory card readers with multiple slots.
• HFS-formatted USB storage devices.
• Devices such as fans or lamps.

Functional requirement

Compatible device, refer to page 53, with USB port.

Connecting the device

Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter cable to a USB port, refer to page 194.

The USB device is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.

Apple CarPlay preparation

Concept

CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and the Central Information Display (CID).

Functional requirements

• Compatible iPhone, refer to page 53. iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
• Corresponding mobile contract.
• Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice operation are activated on the iPhone.
• Booking the MINI Connected service: Apple CarPlay preparation.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:

- "Bluetooth®"

- "Apple CarPlay"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to page 54, via Bluetooth

Select CarPlay as the function:

© "Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list, refer to page 57.

Operation

For more information, refer to the Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.

Frequently Asked Questions

All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as expected.

In this case, the following explanations can help:

The iPhone has already been paired with Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is established, CarPlay can no longer be selected.

• Delete the iPhone concerned from the device list.
• On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned from the list of stored vehicles under Bluetooth and under WLAN.
• Pair the iPhone as a new device.

If the steps listed have been carried out and the required function is still not available: contact the hotline, a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Managing mobile devices

General information

• After one-time pairing, the devices are automatically recognized and reconnected when standby state is switched on.
• The data stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone is transferred to the vehicle after recognition.
• For some devices, certain settings may be necessary, for instance authorization, see owner's manual of the device.

Displaying the device list

All devices paired and/or connected with the vehicle are displayed in the device list.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"

A symbol indicates, for which function a device is used.

Symbol Function

"Telephone"

"Additional telephone"

"Bluetooth® audio"

"Apps"

"Apple CarPlay"

Configuring the device

Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.

If a function is assigned to a device, the function will be deactivated where appropriate for a device that is already connected and the device will be disconnected.

Disconnecting the device

The device's connection to the vehicle is disconnected.

The device remains paired and can be connected again, refer to page 57.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"

Connecting the device

A disconnected device can be reconnected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"

The functions that were assigned to the device before disconnecting are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. The functions may be deactivated on a device already connected.

Deleting the device

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"

The device is disconnected and removed from the device list.

Swapping the telephone and additional phone

If two mobile phones are connected to the vehicle, the functions of the phone and additional phone can be switched.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."

Software update

General information

The vehicle supports a large number of mobile devices, for example mobile phones and MP3 players. Software updates are available for many of the supported devices. The vehicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehicle software updates.

Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop for information on available software updates.

Displaying the version of the installed software

The software version installed in the vehicle is displayed.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"

If an update has been carried out before, select the desired version to display additional information.

Updating software via USB

The software may only be updated when the vehicle is stationary.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Store the file for the software update in the main directory of a USB storage device.
2. Connecting USB storage devices to the USB port.
3. "My MINI"
4. "System settings"
5. "Software update"

6. "Update software"

7. "USB"

8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10. Wait for the update to complete.
11. Confirm system restart.

Restoring the software version

You can restore the software to the version prior to the last update or to its factory settings.

The software may only be restored when the vehicle is stationary.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5. • "Previous version"
     The previous software version is restored.
6. "Default software settings"
   The first software version is restored.
7. "Remove software"
8. "OK"
9. Wait for restore.
10. Confirm system restart.

Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

You can use the following media formats to call up the content in the Owner's Manual:

• Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 60.
• Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, refer to page 60.

Printed Owner's Manual

Concept

The printed Owner's Manual describes all standard, country-specific, and optional features offered with the series.

General information

The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication can be obtained as a printed book from the service center.

Supplementary Owner's Manuals

Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition to the onboard literature.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Concept

The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display.

Selecting the Owner's Manual

1. Press the button.
2. "My MINI"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the desired method of accessing the contents.

Scrolling through the Owner's Manual

Turn the Controller, until the next or previous contents are displayed.

Context help

General information

The section of the Owner's Manual relating to the function that is currently selected can be displayed directly.

Opening via Central Information Display (CID)

Change directly to the Options menu from the function on the Control Display:

1. Press the button.

2. "Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control message is displayed

Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display:

"Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual

To switch from a function, for instance radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays:

1. Press the button.

2. "Owner's Manual"

3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.

1. Press the button again to return to the last displayed function.

1. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last.

To alternate continuously between the last displayed function and the last displayed page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General information

The Owner's Manual can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly.

Storing

1. Select the desired entry point via the Central Information Display (CID):

2. "Quick reference"

3. "Search by pictures"
4. "Keyword search"

5. "Animations"

6. Press and hold the desired button, until a signal sounds.

Executing

1...6 Press the button. The Owner's Manual is displayed immediately.

MINI eDRIVE

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

This MINI is an electric vehicle. The vehicle features a high-voltage system that consists of an electric motor and a high-voltage battery among other things.

The eDRIVE system exhibits the following special features:

- The vehicle is operated emissions free using its electrical drive system.

- The special high-voltage battery supplies the electric motor as well as the comfort features with power.

- The high-voltage battery is charged via a charging cable, for instance when parked or while driving by energy recovery.

- The vehicle can be charged very rapidly at special charging stations. Charging is also possible at household power sockets.

- On the go, the energy recovery ensures that only little energy is lost when braking.

- When the vehicle decelerates, the electric motor acts as a generator and con-

verts the kinetic energy released into electric current.

- As a result the high-voltage battery is partially recharged in order to reach maximum range.

Overview

1 2 3 4 5

1 Drive unit
2 Vehicle battery
3 High-voltage cables
4 Charging socket
5 High-voltage battery

Functions

Electric driving: eDRIVE

The vehicle is powered exclusively by the electric motor. The accelerator pedal can be used not just for acceleration, but also for deceleration. When the vehicle decelerates, the electric motor acts as a generator and charges the high-voltage battery. With a sensible driving style, this function can be used for especially efficient energy recovery and comfortable driving, using just the accelerator pedal.

Acoustic pedestrian protection

The system generates a continuous driving noise during electric driving at low speeds.

Coasting

An especially efficient operating point is so-called coasting. In this case, the vehicle is decelerated only by driving resistance and no energy flows between high-voltage battery and electric motor. In order to coast, depress the accelerator pedal far enough so that the pointer in the performance display, refer to page 120, is between the areas for ePOWER and CHARGE.

Energy recovery: CHARGE

The high-voltage battery is charged while driving through energy recovery.

The electric motor acts as a generator and converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electrical energy.

Charging can take place in various situations while the vehicle is in motion:

• As soon as the accelerator pedal is only slightly depressed.
• As soon as the accelerator pedal is not depressed.

The pointer in the instrument cluster is located in the CHARGE area.

Sensible driving and early speed reduction are important to make full use of the energy recovery feature.

Display

The eDRIVE displays, refer to page 120, provide information about the current state of the drive and visualize the system's use in a diagram.

Energy-saving driving and maximizing the range

Energy-saving driving is the basic prerequisite for as large a range as possible. eDRIVE provides various functions that assist with an energy-saving driving style and help to monitor the range, and if needed, to increase it. The following descriptions provide an overview of the available functions and the personal measures.

Before driving

eDRIVE allows use of the air conditioner even before driving off. The stationary climate control, refer to page 184, provides more range than using full air conditioning while driving.

Parked vehicle ventilation during the charging process can provide maximum range when driving off.

Trip planning and special functions of the navigation system

Several special functions of the navigation system support trip planning taking into account the electric range:

- Range assistant, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual, checks whether an entered navigation destination can be reached. If the range is not sufficient, various recommendations to help increase the range are displayed automatically, for instance, a consumption optimized route based on driving in GREEN Mode is displayed.

- Range map indicates the action range on the navigation map, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual.

- Charging assistant under Points of Interest in navigation, helps to find and possibly include a public charging sta-

tion in the desired route, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual.

During driving

• General driving tips, refer to page 212, for increasing the range.
• Use the eDRIVE system efficiently, refer to page 213, for an optimized driving style.
• MINIMALISM Analyzer, refer to page 216, to analyze the driving style.
• GREEN and GREEN +, refer to page 214, driving mode for increasing the range.
• Information about auxiliary users and the range potential, refer to page 121.

After the trip

• Charge vehicle, refer to page 218, and plan next trip.
• Prepare for long downtimes, refer to page 266.

MINI Connected

The MINI Connected app provides mobility-based services and applications.

Safety of the high-voltage sys- tem

Follow the information on safety, refer to page 65.

Operating noises

Operating noises may occur due to the electrical system. For instance, they may occur in the following situations:

• When cooling the high-voltage battery during the charging process.
• When cooling the high-voltage battery with the drive-ready state switched on.
• When climatizing the car's interior.

Long-term vehicle storage

Observe the information on vehicle storage and for longer idle periods, refer to page 266.

Safety of the high-voltage system

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Working on the vehicle

General information

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that no changes be made to the vehicle, for instance the retrofitting of accessories, that will have an effect on the vehicle's hybrid system.

Safety information

DANGER

Improperly performed work, in particular maintenance and repair on the high-voltage system, can lead to electric shock. There is a risk of injury, fire and danger to life.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that the work on the vehicle, in particular maintenance and repair, be performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Contact with water

The high-voltage system is typically safe even in the following example situations:

• Water in the floor area, for instance after a rainstorm when the window was kept open.
• Vehicle is in water but only up to the allowed height.
• Fluid escapes in the cargo area.

Automatic deactivation

If an accident occurs, the high-voltage system is switched off automatically to prevent risk of danger to occupants and other traffic.

Read the information on What to do after an accident, refer to page 261.

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Vehicle key

General information

The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle keys with integrated key.

Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 69.

Depending on the equipment and country version, various settings, refer to page 78, can be configured for the button functions.

A personal driver profile, refer to page 75, for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.

To provide information on maintenance requirements, the service data is stored in the vehicle key, refer to page 248.

To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position N.
• Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

1 2 3 4

1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 Panic mode

Unlocking

Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 78, the following access points are unlocked.

- Driver's door. Press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points.

- All doors and tailgate.

In addition, the following functions are executed:

- Unlocking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 78.

- The settings stored in the driver profile, refer to page 75, are applied.

- The interior lights, refer to page 139, and the MINI logo projection are switched on, provided that the interior lights were not switched off manually.

• Depending on the settings, the welcome light and pathway lighting, refer to page 136, are switched on.
• Exterior mirrors folded through convenient closing are folded open.
• The alarm system, refer to page 79, is switched off.

The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness.

Convenient opening

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Locking

1. Close the driver's door.

2. Press the button on the vehicle key.

The following functions are executed:

• All doors and the tailgate are locked.
• Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 78.

- The alarm system, refer to page 79, is switched on.

If the drive-ready state is still switched on when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.

With Comfort Access: convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key in the area close to the vehicle.

The windows and the glass sunroof are closed, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

Switch on interior lights and courtesy light

Press the button on the vehicle key with the vehicle locked.

The MINI logo projection is also switched on.

These functions are not available if the interior lights were switched off manually.

The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness.

After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing the button again.

Tailgate

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 78.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Opening

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

- Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

- Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Replacing the battery

1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle key, refer to page 71.

2. Slide the integrated key into the opening and raise the cover. The battery compartment is accessible.

3D rendered illustration of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

1. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the cover.

Cross-sectional diagram of a mechanical device with a lever and housing (no text or symbols)

1. Push battery in the direction of the arrow using a pointed object and lift it out.

Cross-sectional diagram of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols present)

1. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the positive side facing up.

2. Insert lid and cover.

3. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key until it engages.

Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Additional vehicle keys

Additional vehicle keys are available from a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Loss of vehicle keys

A lost vehicle key can be blocked and replaced by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Malfunction

General information

A Check Control message is displayed.

Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances:

- The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 69.

- Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.

- Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects.

- Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehicle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key together with electronic devices.

- Interference of radio transmission by a charging process of mobile devices, for instance charging of a mobile phone.

- The vehicle key is in direct proximity of the wireless charging tray.

Place the vehicle key in a different location.

In the case of interference, the vehicle can be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key, refer to page 70.

Switching on the drive-ready state via emergency detection of the vehicle key

Close-up of a car interior showing a transparent brake lever and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready state if the vehicle key has not been detected.

Proceed as follows in this case:

1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark on the steering column as shown. Pay attention to the display in the instrument cluster.

2. If the vehicle key is detected: Switch on drive-ready state within 10 seconds.

If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly change the position of the vehicle key and repeat the procedure.

Frequently Asked Questions

What precautions can be taken to be able to open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in vehicle key?

- The options provided by the Remote Services of the MINI Connected app include the ability to lock and unlock a vehicle.

This requires an active MINI Connected contract and the MINI Connected app must be installed on a smartphone.

- Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the MINI Connected Call Center.

An active MINI Connected contract is required.

Integrated key

General information

The driver's door can be locked and unlocked without the vehicle key using the integrated key.

Safety information

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

NOTICE

The door lock is permanently joined with the door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Remove the integrated key before pulling the outside door handle.

Removing

1 2 MINI

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2.

Locking/unlocking via the door lock

1. Remove lid on the door lock.

To do this, slide the integrated key into the opening from below and remove the lid.

Close-up of a black curved object with a white arrow pointing to its end, against a dark gradient background (no text or symbols)

1. Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key.

The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside.

Alarm system

The alarm system is not switched on if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key.

The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the door lock.

Buttons for the central locking system

General information

In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.

Overview

Close-up of a car dashboard knob with a dial indicator (no text or symbols visible)

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.

Unlocking

Press the button.

Opening

- Press button to unlock the doors together, and then pull the door handle above the armrest.

Comfort Access

Concept

The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

General information

Comfort Access supports the following functions:

• Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
• Convenient closing.
• Open the tailgate.

Functional requirements

• To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be outside of the vehicle near the doors.
• The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

Unlocking

Abstract black-and-white graphic with a curved arrow and dot, no text or symbols present

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 78, only the driver's door may be unlocked. Unlike when unlocking using the vehicle key, pressing the button on the outer door handle again does not unlock the other vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked again.

If the vehicle was locked automatically after driving off or with the button of the central locking system from the inside, note the following: if a door on a locked vehicle is opened from the inside with the door opener, pressing the button on the outer door handle will first lock the vehicle again. To unlock, the button on the outer door handle must be pressed again.

Locking

Simple diagram of a hand holding a circular object with an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols)

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Simple diagram of a car door handle with an arrow pointing to the handle (no text or symbols)

Press and hold down the button on the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle.

In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof will be closed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

To open the tailgate

General information

If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access, locked doors are not unlocked.

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Opening

Side view of a car's rear bumper with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Press button next on tailgate.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

Malfunction

Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances:

• The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 69.
• Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.
• Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects.

- Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehicle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key together with electronic devices.

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking request recognition function on the door handles.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key or use the integrated key, refer to page 70.

Tailgate

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 78.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Opening and closing

Opening from the outside

Close-up of a car's rear bumper with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

- Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or have the vehicle key with you.

Press button next on tailgate.

- Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking with the vehicle key, refer to page 68.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

Opening from the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, press

the button in the driver's floor area.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, press

the button in the driver's floor area twice in quick succession.

Closing

Top-down view of a transparent plastic container with internal components (no visible text or symbols)

Recessed grips on the interior trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tailgate.

Driver profiles

Concept

In the driver profiles, individual settings for several drivers can be stored and called up again when required.

General information

There are three driver profiles with which personal vehicle settings can be stored. Every vehicle key has been assigned one of these driver profiles.

If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle key, the assigned personal driver profile will be activated. All settings stored in the driver profile are automatically applied.

If several drivers use their own vehicle keys, the vehicle will apply the personal settings as it is being unlocked. These settings are also restored, if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different vehicle key.

Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently activated.

If another driver profile is selected via the Central Information Display (CID), the set-

tings stored in it will be applied automatically. The new driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key that is currently in use.

There is an additional guest profile available that is not assigned to any vehicle key: it can be used to apply settings in the vehicle without changing the personal driver profiles.

Functional requirements

For the system to be able to identify the driver profile associated to a particular driver, the detected vehicle key must be clearly allocated to the driver.

This is the case when:

• The driver is only carrying his or her own vehicle key.
• The driver unlocks the vehicle.
• The driver gets into the vehicle through the driver's door.

Adjusting

The settings for the following systems and functions are stored in the active profile. The scope of storable settings depends on country and equipment.

• Unlocking and locking.
• Lights.
• Radio.
• Instrument cluster.
• Programmable memory buttons.
• Volumes, tone.
• Control Display.
• Climate control.
• Navigation.
• PDC Park Distance Control.
• Rearview camera.
• Head-up Display.
• MINI Driving Modes.
• Intelligent Safety.

Profile management

Selecting a driver profile

Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a different driver profile may be activated. This allows you to call up personal vehicle settings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your own vehicle key.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.

4. "OK"

5. All settings stored in the selected driver profile are automatically applied.

6. The called-up driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key being used at the time.
7. If the driver profile is already assigned to a different vehicle key, this driver profile will apply to both vehicle keys.

Using a guest profile

The guest profile is for individual settings that are stored in none of the three personal driver profiles.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"

The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is assigned to the vehicle key that is not used at the time.

Renaming a driver profile

A personal name can be assigned to the active driver profile to avoid confusion between the driver profiles.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this symbol can be renamed.

1. "Change driver profile name"
2. Enter profile name.
3. Select the symbol.

Resetting a driver profile

The settings of the driver profile currently in use are reset to their factory settings.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this symbol can be reset.

1. "Reset driver profile"
2. "OK"

Exporting driver profiles

Most settings of the active driver profile can be exported.

Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving personal settings, for instance before delivering the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver profiles can be taken into another vehicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this symbol can be exported.

1. "Export driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed.

Importing driver profiles

Profiles stored on a USB storage device can be imported via the USB port.

The existing settings of the active driver profile are overwritten with the settings of the imported driver profile.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.

The driver profile marked with this symbol can be overwritten.

1. "Import driver profile (USB)"
   Select USB storage device as needed.
2. Select the driver profile to be imported.

Displaying driver profiles during start

The driver profiles can be displayed at each startup to select the desired profile.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"

System limits

A clear assignment between the vehicle key and driver may not be possible in the following cases, for example.

• The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or her own vehicle key, but another person is driving.
• The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort Access and has multiple vehicle keys with him or her.
• The driver changes, but the vehicle is not locked and unlocked.

- Multiple vehicle keys are located outside of the vehicle.

Adjusting

General information

Depending on the package and country version, various settings are available for the vehicle key functions.

These settings are stored for the driver profile, refer to page 75, currently used.

Unlocking

Doors

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select the desired setting:

- "Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door is unlocked.

Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle.

- "All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Tailgate

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
   4.

The text next to the symbol indicates the current setting.

1. Select the desired setting:

2. "Tailgate" Only the tailgate is unlocked.

3. "Tailgate and door(s)" The tailgate and the doors are unlocked.
4. "Tailgate opens after unlocking" The vehicle must be unlocked before the tailgate can be used with the vehicle key.
5. "Button lock" It is not possible to use the tailgate via the vehicle key.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, this setting may not be offered.

Automatic locking

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select the desired setting:

- "Lock automatically"

The vehicle locks automatically after a while if no door is opened after un-locking.

- "Lock after starting to drive"

The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off.

Automatic unlocking

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"

After drive-ready state is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is automatically unlocked.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirmation signals.

- "Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, locking by one.

- With alarm system:

"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn.

Alarm system

General information

When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes:

• Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.
• Movements in the car's interior.
• Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, during attempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the vehicle.
• Disconnected battery voltage.
• Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.
• Locking the vehicle while a device is connected to the socket for the OBD On-

board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD

Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 249.

The alarm system signals these changes visually and acoustically:

- Acoustic alarm:

Depending on local regulations, the acoustic alarm may be suppressed.

- Visual alarm:

By flashing of the hazard warning system and headlights, where required.

Do not modify the system to ensure function of the alarm system.

Overview

3D rendered object with a white arrow pointing upward, no visible text or symbols

Indicator light on the interior mirror.

Switching on/off

The alarm system is switched on or off as soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehicle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort Access.

Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on

The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the integrated key in the door lock.

Switching off the alarm, refer to page 80.

Opening the tailgate with the alarm system switched on

The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on.

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again provided the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

- Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

- Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Signals of the indicator light

- The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

- Indicator light flashes for approx.

10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are not correctly closed. Correctly closed access points are secured.

When the still open access points are closed, the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.

- The indicator light goes out after un-locking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

- The indicator light flashes after unlocking until standby state is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes:

An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensor

The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General information

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized action occurred.

Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

- In automatic vehicle washes.

- In duplex garages.

- During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at sea or on a trailer.

- With animals in the vehicle.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor can be switched off in such situations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the button on the vehicle key within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator light lights up for approx.

2 seconds and then continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Switching off the alarm

- Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.

• Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key and activate the standby state via emergency detection of the vehicle key, refer to page 69.
• With Comfort Access: if you have the vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle using the button on the driver's side or passenger side door.

Power windows

General information

If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the windows are automatically closed except a gap.

Safety information

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

Close-up of a black and white electronic device with a control panel and buttons (no visible text or symbols)

Power windows

Opening

the switch to the resistance t.
The window opens while the switch is being held.
the switch beyond the resist- point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening with the vehicle key, refer to page 67.

Closing

• Put the switch to the resistance point.
  The window closes while the switch is being held.

- Put the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient closing with the vehicle key, refer to page 68.

Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 73.

Jam protection system

Concept

The jam protection prevents objects or body parts becoming jammed between the door frame and window while a window is being closed.

General information

If resistance or a blockage is detected while a window is being closed, the closing action is interrupted.

The window opens slightly.

Safety information

Warning

Accessories on the windows such as antennas can impact jam protection. There is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protection system

In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:

1. The switch past the resistance point and hold it there.

The window closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted.

1. the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.

The window closes without jam protection.

Malfunction

General information

In certain situations a window can only be operated to a limited extent.

- After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the a window can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case.

- The power window motors are equipped with overheating protection. If a window is opened and closed several times within a short period of time, the over-

heating protection switches the motor off temporarily. Depending on the degree of overheating, it may only be possible to close the window or it may not be possible to operate it at all.

In this case: allow the power window motor to cool down.

Initializing the system

The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the drive-ready state is switched on.

During initialization, the affected window closes without jam protection.

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

1. Open the affected window completely.

2. the switch to the resistance point and hold.

The window closes.

1. Continue holding the switch pulled to the resistance point.

The window opens and closes once or twice after approx. 15 seconds, depending on the vehicle's equipment.

1. Release switch.

Panoramic glass sunroof

General information

In the event of a severe accident, the glass sunroof is automatically closed.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

Top-down view of a car dashboard with two illuminated buttons and control knobs (no visible text or symbols)

Tilting the glass sunroof

Press back the switch up to or beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is raised.

Opening glass sunroof

When the glass sunroof is closed

Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again

stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

- Slide switch back to the resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof is opened as long as the switch is pressed.

- Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Comfort position

In some models, the wind noises in the car's interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the automatic function initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position.

Pressing the switch again opens the glass sunroof fully.

Closing glass sunroof

With the glass sunroof open

- Slide switch forward to the resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof is closed as long as the switch is pressed and stops in the raised position.

- Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the raised position.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

- Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Jam protection system

Concept

The jam protection prevents objects or body parts from becoming jammed between the roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun-roof is closing.

General information

If resistance or a blockage is detected while the glass sunroof is being closed, the closing action is interrupted.

The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protection system

If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted.

1. Push the switch forward again past the resistance point and hold until the glass

sunroof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Initializing after a power interruption

After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case. MINI recommends having this work performed only by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Sitting safely

An ideal seating position that meets the needs of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

In the event of an accident, the correct seating position plays an important role. Follow the information in the following chapters:

• Seats, refer to page 85.
• Safety belts, refer to page 87.
• Head restraints, refer to page 89.
• Airbags, refer to page 141.

Front seats

Safety information

Warning

Seat adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

Warning

With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the most upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving.

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Adjusting seats

Overview

1 2 3 4

1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt

Forward/backward

Close-up of a car seatbelt mechanism with an arrow pointing to the lower side (no text or symbols visible)

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat forward or back slightly making sure it engages properly.

Height

Close-up of a car's seatbelt mechanism with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Close-up of a car seatbelt in the driver's seat, showing black seating and a white arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols visible)

Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar support

The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Close-up of a car dashboard with a gear shift and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease the curvature.

Thigh support

Close-up of a car's seatbelt mechanism with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support.

Entering the rear

Safety information

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Warning

Unexpected movements of the rear seat backrest while driving may occur if the rear seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the rear seat backrests before driving.

Fold the seat backrest forward

1. Pull lever up to the stop.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest seat and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

1. Fold the seat backrest forward.
2. Push the seat forward.

Original position

The driver's seat features a mechanical memory function for forward/back and backrest adjustment.

1. Push the seat back into the original position.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

If the backrest is folded back when the seat is not yet in the original position, the seat engages in the current position. In this case, manually adjust longitudinal direction, refer to page 86.

Front seat heating

Overview

Close-up of a car dashboard with three circular gauges and a control panel (no readable text or symbols)

Seat heating

Switching on

Press the button once for each temperature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.

If the trip is continued within approx.

15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is activated automatically with the temperature selected last.

When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to page 214, the heating output is reduced.

Switching off

Press and hold the button until the LEDs go out.

Safety belts

Number of safety belts and safety belt buckles

The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to ensure occupant safety. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted correctly.

General information

Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts.

If needed, disengage the safety belt in the rear from the belt buckle on the side.

The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

Safety information

Warning

Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the ability of the safety belt to serve its protective function. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be transported and secured in designated child restraint systems.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations:

• The safety belts or safety belt buckles are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way.
• Belt tensioners or belt retractors were modified.

Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct use of safety belts

• Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to your body over your lap and shoulders.
• Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over your lap. The safety belt may not press on your stomach.
• Do not rub the safety belt against sharp edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects.
• Avoid thick clothing.
• Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward around your upper body.

Buckling the safety belt

1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder and hip to put it on.

2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage audibly.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Unbuckling the safety belt

1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up mechanism.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.

The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Safety belt reminder for rear seats

General information

The safety belt reminder is automatically activated each time the drive-ready state is switched on.

The safety belt reminder is also activated when a passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt during the trip.

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates after switching on the drive-ready state.

Symbol Description

Green: the safety belt is buckled on the corresponding rear seat.

Red: the safety belt is not buckled on the corresponding rear seat.

Front head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to removed or not correctly adjusted head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.
• Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.
• Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
• Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.
• Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
• Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height

Interior view of a car showing a white vehicle headrest with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

• To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.
• To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle's seat and dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest forward.
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Installing

Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Rear head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to removed or not correctly adjusted head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.
• Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.
• Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
• Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.
• Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
• Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height

Interior view of a car showing a white car head and side arm with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

• To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.
• To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Fold down

3D rendered image of a white helmet inside a car, with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

• To fold down: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.
• Forward: fold the head restraint toward the front as far as it will go. Make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

Close-up of a car interior showing a white spherical object with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to page 203, in question.
2. Pull head restraint up against the resistance.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Installing

Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General information

The mirror on the front passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

Safety information

Warning

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the traffic behind could be incorrectly estimated, for instance while changing lanes. There is a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.

Overview

1 2 3

1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch.

Adjusting electrically

Press the button.

The mirror movement follows the button movement.

Malfunction

In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.

Folding in and out

NOTICE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle can be damaged in vehicle washes.

There is a risk of damage to property. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.

Press the button.

Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.

Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the following situations:

- In vehicle washes.

- On narrow roads.

Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx.

25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heating

Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as needed and when the standby state is switched on.

Automatic dimming feature

The exterior mirror on the driver's side is automatically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior mirror, refer to page 93, are used to control this.

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror

Concept

If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other formatting issue - low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.

Activating

1. slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating

Slide the switch to the passenger's side mirror position.

Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever

Abstract 3D diagram of a funnel-shaped object with upward arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mirror, flip the lever forward.

Turn knob

3D diagram of a bowl with a central knob and directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.

Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature

Overview

Two black medical or anatomical views of a device, showing internal structures with white arrows pointing to features (no text or symbols present)

Photocells are used for control:

• In the mirror glass.
• On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements

• Keep the photocells clean.
• Do not cover the area between the interior mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Safety information

Warning

Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Adjusting the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only.

Adjusting

Interior view of a car dashboard with a white arrow pointing to the left side of the keyhole (no text or symbols visible)

1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up.

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

The right place for children

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position N.
• Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning

A heated vehicle may result in death to persons, especially children, or animals. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not leave persons, especially children, or animals unattended in the vehicle.

Warning

Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child restraint systems and their components to become very hot. Persons may sustain burn injuries when touching the hot components. There is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight or cover where necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint system cool down before transporting a child. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Always transport children in the rear seat

General information

Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat.

Transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat in suitable child restraint systems designed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, or size.

Safety information

Warning

The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suitable additional child restraint systems. The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.

Children on the front passenger seat

General information

Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. For automatic deactivation of front-seat passenger airbags, refer to page 143.

Safety information

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Installing child restraint systems

General information

Pay attention to the specifications of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using child restraint systems.

In order to facilitate the installation of a back-facing child restraint system in the rear:

Move the front passenger seat as far up as possible before folding down the backrest.

Safety information

Warning

The protective effect of child restraint systems and their fastening systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident can be limited or lost. A child cannot be properly restrained in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Do not use child restraint systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident.

If a child restraint system and its fastening system has been damaged or exposed to an accident, have these systems checked and replaced by the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

On the rear seats

In order to facilitate the installation of a back-facing child restraint system:

Move the front passenger seat as far up as possible before folding down the backrest.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated and

that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.

Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags automatically, refer to page 143.

Seat position and height

Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident.

If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is located in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.

Child seat security

Interior view of a car showing a white and black seatbelt with visible branding, no text or symbols present.

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt

1. Pull out the belt strap completely.

2. Secure the child restraint system with the safety belt.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt

1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in completely.

LATCH child restraint fixing system

General information

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.

Pay attention to the operating and safety information from the child restraint system manufacturer when installing and using LATCH child restraint fixing systems.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors

The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Safety information

Warning

If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are not correctly engaged, the protective effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are securely engaged and that the LATCH child restraint

fixing system fits securely against the backrest.

Position

Symbol Meaning

The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.

Before installing LATCH child restraint fixing systems

Pull the safety belt away from the area of the child restraint system.

Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems

1. Install child restraint system, see manufacturer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are properly engaged.

Child restraint systems with tether strap

Safety information

Warning

If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective effect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes the upper anchor.

Warning

If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective effect of the child restraint system is limited or there is none. In certain situations, for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an accident, the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the rear backrests are locked.

NOTICE

The anchors for the upper retaining straps of child restraint systems are only provided for these retaining straps. When other objects are mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only mount child restraint systems to the upper anchors.

Anchors

The respective symbol shows the anchor for the upper retaining strap.

Seats with an upper top tether are

marked with this symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.

Routing the retaining strap

1 2 6 3 5 4

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Anchor

5 Seat backrest

6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the anchor

1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.

2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retaining strap between or along both sides of the supports of the head restraint to the anchor.

3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the anchor on the rear seat.

4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.

Driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Start/Stop button

Concept

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches standby state on or off.

Drive-ready state is switched on when you depress the

brake pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button.

Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches drive-ready state back off and radio-ready state is switched back on.

The drive-ready state cannot be activated as long as the charging cable is connected, refer to page 218.

Radio-ready state

Some electronic systems/power consumers are ready for operation.

The radio-ready state is switched off automatically:

• If the driver's or front passenger door is opened when exiting the vehicle, with drive-ready state switched off manually.
• After approx. 8 minutes.
• When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system.
• If the charge state of the batteries is low.

Radio-ready state remains active if, for instance drive-ready state is automatically switched off for the following reasons:

- Opening or closing the driver's door.

- Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.

- When automatically switching from low beams to parking lights.

Radio-ready state is also switched back on if the on/off button on the radio is pressed when the vehicle is parked.

If drive-ready state is switched on: the system automatically switches to radio-ready state when the driver's door is opened and the driver's safety belt is unbuckled if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on.

Standby state

All electronic systems/power consumers are ready for operation. Odometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster.

To preserve the battery, use standby state and activated power features only as long as absolutely necessary.

Turning on standby state

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches standby state on or off.

Standby state is switched off automatically:

• When locking the vehicle, even if the low beams are switched on.
• When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off.
• While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled with driver's door open and low beams off.
• When the batteries' state of charge is low, if the low beams are switched off.
• The low beams switch to parking lights after approx. 15 minutes of no use.
• When the front doors are opened if there is no other person sitting in the front seats.

Drive-ready state

Activated drive-ready state is the equivalent of a running engine in conventional vehicles. Deactivated drive-ready state is equivalent to switching the engine off.

If drive-ready state is switched on, the vehicle ready to drive and the pointer in the instrument cluster is on READY signal, refer to page 101.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time.

To save battery power when parking, switch off drive-ready state and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

The drive-ready state is switched off automatically if the driver's safety belt is not buckled when the driver's door is opened.

Safety information

NOTICE

Selector lever position P is automatically engaged when drive-ready state is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch drive-ready state off in vehicle washes.

Drive-ready state in detail

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Switching on drive-ready state

1. Close the driver's door.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
   Drive-ready state is switched on.

Display in the instrument cluster

The READY display indicates that the vehicle is ready for driving.

Driving off

Functional requirements

Driving is possible under the following conditions:

• The high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged.
• The driver's door is closed.

State of charge in strong temperature fluctuations

In the case of strong temperature fluctuations and a low state of charge of the high-voltage battery, it may not be possible to start the vehicle again at the beginning of the next trip. Recharge vehicle with low state of charge in time.

Driving

1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Apply the brake and engage the selector lever in position D or R.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive.

Selector lever positions

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with a white handheld device (no visible text or symbols)

The engaged selector lever position is displayed on the selector lever.

D Drive

Position for normal vehicle operation.

R is reverse

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is Neutral

The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to page 103, in selector lever position N.

P Park

Engage only while the vehicle is stationary and the brake is applied. The drive wheels are blocked.

Selector lever position P is engaged automatically in the following situations:

• If the driver's safety belt is off, the driver's door is open and neither brake nor accelerator pedal are depressed while drive-ready state is switched on and selector lever position D or R is set.
• After switching off drive-ready state via the Start/Stop button, if selector lever position D or R is set.
• With standby state switched off.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move. On uphill

grades, also Set parking brake, refer to page 107.

Engaging selector lever positions

General information

• Interlock: the selector lever position P can be exited only with drive-ready state engaged.
• Shift lock: with the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed.
• Shift lock: before shifting out of P, remove the charging cable from the vehicle; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed.

Engage D, N, R

A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation:

• Unintentional shifting into selector lever position R.

• Unintentional shifting from selector lever position P into another selector lever position.

• Press and hold the button to release the selector lever lock.

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with a white arrow pointing to the mode (no text or symbols visible)

1. With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push the selector lever in the desired direction, past a resistance point, if needed. The selector lever automati-

cally returns to the center position when released.

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Engaging P

Close-up of a mechanical lever mechanism with a white arrow pointing to the pivot point (no text or symbols visible)

Press button P.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General information

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power for a short distance, for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N

1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Engage selector lever position N.
5. Switch off drive-ready state.

In this way, standby state remains switched on, and a Check Control message is displayed.

The vehicle can roll.

NOTICE

Selector lever position P is automatically engaged when standby state is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch standby state off in vehicle washes.

Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever position P is automatically engaged after approx. 15 minutes.

If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position.

Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if needed.

Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock

General information

Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from a danger area.

Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

Engaging selector lever position N

1. Hold the Start/Stop button pressed.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press and hold the selector lever in position N.
   A corresponding Check Control message is displayed.

4. Press the selector lever again into position N within approx. 2 seconds.
   Position N is indicated on the selector lever.

5. Release Start/Stop button and brake.

6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area and secure it against moving on its own.

Switching off drive-ready state

Park the vehicle. Noises from the electrical system such as for cooling the high-voltage system might still be audible.

After stopping the vehicle:

1. Apply brake and engage the selector lever in position P.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
   The READY indicator goes out and a signal sounds.
   In case of longer idle times, follow the instructions in the Care chapter, refer to page 266.

Driving in detail: eDRIVE

Safety information

! DANGER

The braking power of the electric motor can be stronger than for a vehicle with combustion engine. Abrupt braking and slow-down may confuse other traffic. There is a risk of accident. Carefully release the accelerator pedal. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

When driving in electric mode, pedestrians and other traffic might pay less attention to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Without energy recovery, there is no braking power of the electric motor available. The vehicle could roll further than anticipated. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Accelerator pedal positions

Diagram illustrating three stages of a mechanical lever system with labeled components 1, 2, and 3.

1 Deceleration
2 Coasting
3 Acceleration or constant speed: ePO- WER

Deceleration

Releasing the accelerator pedal causes deceleration similar to cautious braking. Additionally, the brake lights will come on without hitting the brakes.

The degree of the deceleration depends on the energy recovery, refer to page 106, setting.

During the deceleration, energy is recovered and the high-voltage battery is charged.

Energy recovery: CHARGE

The high-voltage battery is recharged in part through energy recovery. The electric motor acts as a generator when decelerating and converts the kinetic energy into electrical energy.

Energy can be recovered if the following conditions are met:

• The vehicle is moving.
• Speed higher than approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.
• Selector lever position D or R is set.
• Accelerator pedal is not actuated or only pressed down one third of the way.

Energy cannot be recovered in the following situations:

• Selector lever position N is engaged.
• While drive stability control systems, for instance DTC, are active and controlling the vehicle, even though this is not indicated by an indicator light.
• The high-voltage battery is fully charged.
• When temperature of the high-voltage battery is very low or very high.

In winter it might be possible that the energy recovery is temporarily unavailable after startup.

Exemplary traffic situations

If a deceleration operation is foreseeable while driving, this can be used for energy recovery.

The following exemplary driving situations may be suitable:

• Decelerating downhill.
• Deceleration before a red light.

Avoid late or abrupt braking. Instead, decelerate the vehicle using energy recovery.

Set energy recovery

Concept

The energy recovery is adjustable.

• High energy recovery: the vehicle decelerates faster, more energy is returned to the high-voltage battery.
• Low energy recovery: the vehicle decelerates more slowly, less energy is returned to the high-voltage battery.

Overview

Close-up of a car dashboard with five white buttons arranged in a row (no text or symbols visible)

Energy recovery

Adjusting

Press the button up or down.

• LED off: high energy recovery.
• LED illuminated: low energy recovery.
  The setting is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Coasting

The electric drive makes it possible to roll without consuming energy. This driving condition is referred to as coasting.

Proactive driving reduces energy consumption and increases the range.

With vehicle rolling, no energy is recovered.

Exemplary traffic situations

If a route can be traveled without anticipated need for braking, it is advantageous to roll.

The following exemplary driving situations may be suitable:

• Rolling on a straight downhill route without obstacles.
• Coasting on a route without obstacles.
  Avoid late or abrupt braking.

Acoustic pedestrian protection

The system generates a continuous driving noise during electric driving up to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the surroundings.

As a result, other road users, for instance pedestrians or cyclists, can better perceive the vehicle.

Heavily discharged high-voltage battery

If the high-voltage battery is heavily discharged during the trip, the performance and some comfort features are reduced step-by-step to extend the range.

Heated high-voltage battery

With a stationary vehicle

In isolated cases, when the vehicle is stationary, it is possible for the high-voltage battery to overheat, for instance, as a result of extreme hot or cold temperatures or direct sunlight. Drive-ready state cannot be

switched on if the high-voltage battery is overheated.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Another message will indicate when drive-ready state is available again.

While driving

If the high-voltage battery overheats during the trip, the performance is reduced step-by-step in order to cool down the battery.

The ePOWER performance display in the instrument cluster decreases. If the temperature increases further, park the vehicle until the high-voltage battery has cooled down. If the performance display falls to 0, the drive-ready state is switched off and the vehicle comes to a stop.

Parking brake

Concept

The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position N.
• Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

Close-up of a car dashboard with a control knob and scroll wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Parking brake

Setting

With a stationary vehicle

(P) Pull the switch. The LED lights up.

The indicator light lights up red. The parking brake is set.

Depending on the stopping situation, the parking brake is engaged automatically.

In some parking situations, the parking brake is automatically engaged, when selector lever position P is engaged. In these cases, the parking brake is released automatically when you leave the selector lever position P.

While driving

To use as emergency brake while driving: Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled.

The indicator light lights up red, a signal sounds and the brake lights light up.

A Check Control message is displayed.

If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete stop, the parking brake is engaged.

Releasing

Releasing manually

1. Switch on standby state.

2. P is the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Automatic release

For automatic release, step on the accelerator pedal.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is automatically released when you step on the accelerator pedal under the following conditions:

- Standby state switched on.

- Drive mode engaged.

– Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Malfunction

If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure the vehicle against rolling before exiting.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for instance with a wheel chock, after exiting the vehicle.

After a power failure

Re-activating the parking brake

1. Switch on standby state.

2. P is the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.

It may take several seconds for the brake to be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds associated with this process are normal.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation.

Hold function

Concept

The system holds the vehicle automatically when gear is engaged. This prevents rolling against the direction of travel.

In selector lever position D, the vehicle cannot roll backwards. In selector lever position R, it cannot roll forward. The brake pedal does not have to be pressed.

Reducing energy consumption

To reduce energy consumption when the hold function is activated, activate the parking brake or engage the selector lever in position P when the vehicle is stopped for long periods of time.

The hold function can be affected by the vehicle's load and the road incline. If needed, a Check Control message will appear and position P will be selected automatically.

Turn signal, high beams, head-light flasher

Turn signal

Using turn signals

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle wheel and dashboard with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Press the lever past the resistance point.

Canada: the lever returns into its starting position after actuation. To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance point.

Triple turn signal activation

Lightly tap the lever up or down.

The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Signaling briefly

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Malfunction

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a left-handled rotary knob and numbered arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

• High beams on, arrow 1.
  The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.
  – High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Wiper system

General information

Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

Car interior control panel with numbered directional arrows indicating vehicle movement or status

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

• Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
• Intermittent operation or rain sensor, position 1.
• Normal wiper speed, position 2.
• Fast wiper speed, position 3.

When travel is interrupted with the wiper system switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed.

Switching off and brief wipe

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted cable connector and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Press the lever down.

- Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position.

- Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept

The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information

The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating

Car interior control panel with numbered directional arrows indicating vehicle positions or motion directions

Press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start.

Deactivating

Press the lever back into the standard position.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel, air vent, and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the interval.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sensor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air vent (no visible text or symbols)

Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are automatically heated while standby state is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Interior view of a car dashboard with three circular arrows indicating rotational or directional movement (no text or symbols)

Switching on

Turn the outer switch upward.

- Resting position of the wiper, position 0.

- Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.

• In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released.
• In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept

The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information

Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property.

Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers

1. Switch standby state on and off again.

2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the wipers stop in a close to vertical position.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a white cylindrical connector and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Close-up of a car's front window with two white arrows pointing to the side panels (no text or symbols visible)

Folding down the wipers

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.

2. Switch on standby state.

3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Canada: wiper system

General information

Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point.

- Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

- Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Switching off and brief wipe

Interior view of a car dashboard with a white plastic connector and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Press the lever down.

• To switch off from fast wiper speed: press down twice.
• To switch off from normal wiper speed: press down once.
  – Brief wipe: press down once.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept

The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information

The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating/deactivating

Interior view of a car showing a plug inserted into the dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started.

If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start.

If a journey is interrupted with the rain sensor switched on: if the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automatically activated again.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Close-up of a car dashboard and steering wheel with a white arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols visible)

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the interval.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sensor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air vent (no visible text or symbols)

Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are automatically heated while standby state is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Interior view of a car dashboard with three circular arrows indicating clockwise rotation (no text or symbols)

Switching on

Turn the outer switch upward.

• Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
• Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.

• In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released.
• In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept

The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information

Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property.

Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up past the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical position.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air vent (no visible text or symbols)

1. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Close-up of a car's front window with two white arrows pointing to the sides of the window (no text or symbols visible)

Folding down the wipers

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.
2. Switch on standby state.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Washer fluid

General information

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reservoir.

Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used.

Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information

Warning

Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container.

Use of BMW's Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent is recommended.

NOTICE

Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add silicon-containing additives to the washer fluid.

NOTICE

Mixing different windshield washer concentrates or antifreeze can damage the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not mix different windshield washer concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the information and mixing ratios provided on the containers.

Overview

Black and white photo of a vehicle's license plate with a warning symbol (no text or numbers visible)

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.

Malfunction

The use of undiluted windshield washer concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to incorrect readings at temperatures below +5 °F/-15 °C.

Displays

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Instrument cluster

Overview

1 Performance display 120
2 Display/reset miles 124
3 Electronic displays 119

Charging screen 119

4 Vehicle speed
5 Indicator/warning lights
6 High-voltage battery charge indicator 120

Electronic displays

1 2 3 4 76 5 6

1 Selector lever position 101
2 Time 125

MINI Driving Modes switch status 164

3 Driver assistance systems
4 External temperature 125

Charging screen

Overview

70 0 mi 90 mi 3 1 —— 10:38 4 30.11.2019 5

1 Stationary climate control 225
2 Charging status 225

Range 125

5 Messages, for instance Check Control

Selection lists 128

Navigation instructions

6 Total miles/trip odometer 124

Onboard Computer 129

Current range

3 Maximum range
4 End of charging time 225

Departure time with timer 225

5 Departure time with timer 225

Displays of the eDRIVE sys- tem

Displays in the instrument cluster

Concept

The display depends on the system's operating condition. The following functions of the eDRIVE system are shown in the instrument cluster

• High-voltage battery charge indicator.
• Performance display.
• Drive-ready state: READY.

High-voltage battery charge indicator

Display

The fill level bars indicate the available charge state of the high-voltage battery when standby state and drive-ready state are switched on.

Safety information

Warning

Even when it is indicated that the high-voltage battery is discharged, the high-voltage system is always still under high voltage. There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Do not touch or change live parts, for instance orange high-voltage cables, even when the batteries are discharged.

Performance display

Concept

A pointer indicates the power output in a scale.

The efficient range for electric driving ePO-WER and energy recovery CHARGE is shown in yellow.

General information

Depending on the available power, the efficient range for electric driving ePOWER is adjusted automatically.

The efficient range for energy recovery depends on the settings via the button for the energy recovery. Set energy recovery, refer to page 106.

The available power may be reduced due to the following factors:

• Heavily discharged high-voltage battery.
• Extreme external temperatures.
• When driving on steep inclines, with a sporty driving style or in other high-power driving conditions.

Optimizing the driving style, refer to page 213.

Display

Pointer in the CHARGE range, arrow 1: display for energy recovery by coasting or when decelerating:

• Both LEDs are illuminated yellow: high energy recovery.
• One LED is illuminated yellow: low energy recovery.

Pointer in the ePOWER range, arrow 2: efficient acceleration.

Drive-ready state: READY

POWER READY CHARGE OFF

The READY display indicates that the vehicle is ready for driving. Drive-ready state in detail, refer to page 101.

Indications on the Control Display

Energy flow of the eDRIVE system

General information

The display shows the eDRIVE system while driving or charging the vehicle:

• Yellow: electrical energy.
• Arrow: direction of the energy flow.
• The operating states, such as eDRIVE, are displayed.

Displaying the energy flow

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"

Auxiliary users

General information

The following information is displayed:

• If necessary, information about settings for energy recovery.
• Range potential when switching off individual auxiliary users.
• Current range.

With split screen: show auxiliary user

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"

Without split screen: show auxiliary user

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Comfort information"

Check Control

Concept

The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems.

General information

A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a SMS text message may appear on the Control Display.

Indicator/warning lights

General information

The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready state is established.

Red lights

Safety belt reminder

Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.

Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensioner may not be working.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake

The parking brake is set.

For releasing the parking brake, refer to page 108.

Approach control warning

Indicator light illuminates: advance warning is issued, for example when there is the impending danger of a

collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

Increase the distance.

Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another vehicle at a relatively high differential speed.

Intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Person warning

If a collision with a detected person is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal sounds.

Yellow lights

Antilock Braking System ABS

The Brake Assistant function may not activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer braking distance

into account.

Have the system immediately checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce

speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned.

Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

DSC, refer to page 162.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.

DSC, refer to page 162, and DTC, refer to page 163.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The FTM signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 150.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The indicator light illuminates: the Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.

Follow the information in the Check Control message.

The indicator light flashes and is then illuminated continuously: flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot be detected.

• Interference caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.
• TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again.
• A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.
• Malfunction: have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 145.

Steering system

Steering system may not be working.

Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive

Acoustic pedestrian protection defective.

Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Green lights

Turn signal

Turn signal switched on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Turn signal, refer to page 109.

Parking lights, headlight

Parking lights or headlights are switched on.

Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, refer to page 135.

Front fog lights

Front fog lights are switched on.

Front fog lights, refer to page 138.

High-beam Assistant

High-beam Assistant is switched on.

High beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the traffic situation.

High-beam Assistant, refer to page 137.

Cruise control

The system is switched on. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering

wheel.

Blue lights

High beams

High beams are switched on.

High beams, refer to page 109.

Hiding Check Control messages

Close-up of a car interior showing a white arrow pointing to a connected audio jack (no text or symbols visible)

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Continuous display

Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively.

The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed again automatically.

Temporary display

Some Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check Control messages are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.

Display

Check Control

At least one Check Control message is displayed or stored.

SMS text messages

SMS text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator/warning lights.

Supplementary SMS text messages

Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display.

Depending on the Check Control message, further help can be selected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting.

Messages after trip completion

Certain messages displayed while driving are displayed again after standby state is switched off.

Odometer and trip odometer

Concept

The total mileage driven and the mileage driven since the last reset are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Reset trip distance

Press the button.

• The odometer is displayed when the standby state is switched off.
• When standby state is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.

External temperature

General information

If the indicator drops to +37 °F/+3 °C, a signal sounds.

A Check Control message is displayed. There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Safety information

Warning

Even at temperatures above +37 °F/+3 °C there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on bridges or shady sections of the road. There is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures.

Display

The external temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Time

The time is displayed in the instrument cluster. Set the time on the Central Information Display (CID), refer to page 48.

Date

The date is displayed in the instrument cluster. Set the date on the Central Information Display (CID), refer to page 49.

Range

General information

Always make sure that the range is sufficient for the planned trip. The range is dynamic and can abruptly change.

The range can be abruptly reduced or increased based on the following factors:

• Driving style.
• Traffic conditions.
• Program changes via the MINI Driving Modes switch.
• Climate and terrain conditions.
• Automatic climate control settings.
• After identification of a route through the navigation system depending on the route profile, route distance and selected speed.
• When exiting a route or recalculating a route.

Further information about the topic Increasing the range, refer to page 212.

Check Control messages indicate a limited range.

Display

19mi

The expected range for the energy stored in the high-voltage battery is continuously displayed in the instrument cluster.

Heavily discharged high-voltage battery

The high-voltage battery is heavily discharged. Its power output will be reduced. Heating and climate control functions will be deactivated. In this state, the exact range can no longer be calculated. A short range may still be available depending on the environmental conditions.

State of charge in strong temperature fluctuations

In the case of strong temperature fluctuations and a low state of charge of the high-voltage battery, it may not be possible to start the vehicle again at the beginning of the next trip. Recharge vehicle with low state of charge in time.

Service notifications

Concept

The function displays the service notifications and the corresponding maintenance scopes.

General information

The driving distance or the time to the next scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly in the instrument cluster after standby state is switched on.

A service advisor can read out the current service notifications from your vehicle key.

Display

Detailed information on service notifications

More information on the type of service required may be displayed on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"

Maintenance and service measures and legally mandated inspections are displayed.

1. Select an entry to call up detailed information.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently required.

The deadline for scheduled maintenance or a legally mandated inspection is approaching.

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering appointment dates

Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle inspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.

Automatic Service Request

Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections is automatically transmitted to your dealer's service center before your vehicle is due for service.

You can check when your dealer's service center was notified.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Teleservice Call"

Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info

Concept

Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

General information

The camera at the base of the interior mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc., are also detected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation.

With the navigation system, the system takes into account the information stored in the navigation data and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Camera

Front view of a car with a white upward arrow symbol on the windshield (no text or labels)

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Display

Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Speed Limit Info

The last speed limit detected.

With navigation system: Speed Limit Info is not available.

Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

System limits

The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following situations:

- In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.

- When traffic signs are fully or partially concealed by objects, stickers or paint.

- When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.

- When driving toward bright lights or strong reflections.

- When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc.

- In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.

- If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect.

- In areas not covered by the navigation system.

- When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing.

- When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.

- If the traffic signs are non-conforming.

- When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected.

- During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.

Selection lists

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the buttons on the steering wheel and the display in the instrument cluster can be used to display or use the following:

- Current audio source.

- Phone redial.

- Turn on voice activation system.

Activating a list and adjusting the setting

Button on the steering wheel	Function
	Move selection up.
	Move selection down.
	Confirm the selec-tion.

Display

Off The Rails The Room Solitaire

Onboard Computer

Concept

The Onboard Computer displays different vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such as average values.

Calling up information

Interior view of a car showing a car wheel and gear shift knob (no text or symbols visible)

Press the button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance

Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information:

• Average consumption.
• Average speed.
• Charge state of the high-voltage battery.
• Date.
• Distance to destination.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

- Time of arrival.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

- Trip odometer.

The unit of some information can be changed.

Setting units, refer to page 49.

Selecting information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select what information from the On-board Computer can be accessed in the instrument cluster.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Information in detail

Display of charge state of the high-voltage battery as a percentage

The current charge state of the high-voltage battery can be displayed as a %-value.

Average consumption

The average consumption is calculated on the basis of various distances. Periods when the vehicle is parked with driveready state switched off are not considered.

Average speed

Periods when the vehicle is parked with drive-ready state switched off are not included when calculating average speed.

Resetting average values

Close-up of a car interior showing a white USB port and directional arrow (no text or symbols visible)

Press and hold the button on the turn signal lever.

Distance to destination

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started.

The distance to the destination is adopted automatically.

Time of arrival

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started.

The time must be correctly set.

Onboard Computer on the Control Display

Concept

The Onboard Computer displays different vehicle data on the Control Display, such as average values.

General information

Two types of Onboard Computers are available on the Control Display:

- "Onboard info": average values, such as the consumption, are displayed. The values can be reset individually.

- "Trip computer": the values deliver an overview of a specific route and can be reset as often as necessary.

Calling up the Onboard Computer or trip computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the Onboard Computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"

Resetting the trip computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
5. "Reset": all values are reset.

6. "Automatic reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has come to a standstill.

7. If necessary, "OK"

Speed warning

Concept

A speed limit can be set that when reached will cause a warning to be issued.

General information

The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.

Adjusting

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.

Activating/deactivating

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"

Setting your current speed as the speed warning

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"

LED ring on the central instrument cluster

Concept

The LED ring displays light animations to represent specific functions.

Basic displays

Basic functions, such as the state of charge of the high-voltage battery, can be set to be displayed continually if so desired.

Event displays

Functions that are only displayed temporarily, for instance the volume or temperature settings, can be set as event displays.

Several vehicle assistance functions can also be displayed on the LED ring. This display corresponds with the displays of the function in the respective display.

Switching on/off LED ring

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Center Instrument"

Adjusting the LED ring

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Basic display" or "Event display"
6. Select the desired setting.

Setting the brightness

The brightness can be adjusted when night lighting is active in the instrument cluster. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Head-up Display

Concept

This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed.

The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road.

General information

Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-up Display. For additional information, see the chapter on care.

Safety information

Warning

When extending and retracting the projection screen of the Head-up Display, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the projection screen is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The Head-up Display consists of sensitive components that can easily be scraped or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place any objects on the Head-up Display, attach to system compo-

nents or plug into the system. Do not move the moving parts manually.

Overview

Close-up of a car's wheel and roof component (no visible text or symbols)

Switching the Head-up Display on/off

When switching on, the projection lens of the Head-up Display is extended. When switching off, the projection lens of the Head-up Display is retracted again.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Head-Up Display"

Display

Overview

The following information is displayed on the Head-up Display:

• Vehicle speed.
• Navigation instructions.
• Check Control messages.
• Selection list from the instrument cluster.
• Driver assistance systems.

Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up Display

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired displays in the Head-up Display.

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the brightness

The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness.

The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.

When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be additionally influenced using the instrument lighting, refer to page 139.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Adjusting the height

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is reached.
7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the rotation

The screen of the Head-up Display can be rotated around its own axis.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is selected.
7. Press the Controller.
   The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Display visibility

The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by the following factors:

• Certain sitting positions.
• Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.

• Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.

• Wet roads.

• Unfavorable light conditions.

Vehicle status

General information

The status can be displayed and actions performed for several systems.

Opening the vehicle status

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"

Information at a glance

Symbols Description

(!) "Flat Tire Monitor": status of the run-flat tires, refer to page 150.

(!) "Tire Pressure Monitor": status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to page 145.

⚠️ "Check Control": Check Control messages are stored in the background and can be displayed on the Control Display. Displaying stored Check Control messages, refer to page 124.

💡 "Service required": displaying service notifications, refer to page 126.

💡 "Teleservice Call": Service Request.

Lights

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview

Switches in the vehicle

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard, steering wheel, and keyway (no visible text or symbols)

The light switch element is located next to the steering wheel.

Symbol Function

#0	Front fog lights.
	Automatic headlight control.Cornering light.
	Lights off.Daytime running lights.

Symbol Function

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Parking lights, low beams and roadside parking lights

General information

Position of switch: 0, 3D 3D

If the driver's door is opened when standby state is switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off.

Parking lights

Position of switch: D E

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extended periods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and it would then be impossible to switch on drive-ready state.

When parking, switch on the one-sided roadside parking light, refer to page 136.

Low beams

Position of switch: ≡D

The low beams illuminate when standby state is switched on.

Canada: roadside parking light

Concept

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle seatbelt and dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

With radio-ready state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching off

Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Welcome lights and pathway lighting

Welcome lights

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ambient brightness, individual light functions may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivating

Position of switch:

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Welcome lights"

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Pathway lighting

General information

The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlight flasher is switched on after the vehicle's radio-ready state is switched off.

Setting the duration

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic headlight control

Concept

The low beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation.

General information

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.

Activating

Position of switch:

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

System limits

The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment of lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch the lights on manually.

Daytime running lights

General information

The daytime running lights light up when standby state is switched on. After standby state is switched off, the parking lights light up in position

Activating/deactivating

In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deactivate the daytime running lights.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the currently used vehicle key.

Cornering light

General information

Position of switch:

In tight curves, for instance on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, cornering light is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.

The cornering light is automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or, where applicable, the use of turn signals.

When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may be automatically switched on regardless of the steering angle.

Adaptive headlight range control

The adaptive headlight range control feature balances out acceleration and braking processes as well as the vehicle load conditions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.

High-beam Assistant

Concept

The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic participants early on and automatically switches the high beams on or off depending on the traffic situation.

General information

The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the low speed range, the high beams are not switched on by the system.

The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.

The high beams can be switched on and off manually at any time.

Activating/deactivating

Interior view of a car showing a car's seatbelt switch and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Position of switch:

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

The headlights are automatically switched between low beams and high beams.

The blue indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams.

The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high beams on and off, refer to page 109.

To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limits

The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. In situation that require this, therefore switch off manually.

The system is not fully functional in the following situations, and driver intervention may be necessary:

- In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation.

• When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
• In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways.
• In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the presence of highly reflective signs.
• When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights

Front fog lights

Concept

The front fog lights work alongside the low beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway.

Functional requirement

The low beams must be switched on before switching on the front fog lights.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The green indicator light lights up if the front fog lights are switched on.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 136, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights.

When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated, the front fog lights are not switched on.

Instrument lighting

Functional requirement

The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness.

Adjusting

Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel.

Interior lights

General information

Depending on the equipment, the interior lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy lights are controlled automatically.

The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting controls brightness of some of these features.

Overview

2 1 3 2

1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lights on/off

Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds.

Switching the reading lights on and off manually

Press the button.

The reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light.

Ambient light

General information

Depending on the equipment version, lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the car's interior.

Activating/deactivating

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Changing color

Push the switch forward or back: manual color change.

Press the switch forward or backward and hold for approx. 3 seconds, until the ambient light illuminates

several times: automatic color change. Push the switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightness

Depending on the equipment, the brightness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.

Safety

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Airbags

Interior view of a car with numbered anatomical labels pointing to specific sections

1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag

5 Knee airbag

Front airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and the front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide adequate protection.

Side airbag

In the event of a side impact, the side air-bag protects the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbag

In the event of a side impact, the head airbag protects the head.

Ejection Mitigation

The head airbag system is designed as an ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side impact events.

Knee airbag

The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of a frontal impact.

Protective effect

Airbags are not triggered in every impact situation, for instance in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information on optimum effect of the airbags

Warning

If the seat position is incorrect or the deployment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag system cannot provide protection as intended and may cause additional injuries due to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the information on achieving the optimum protective effect of the airbag system.

• Keep a distance from the airbags.
• Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered.
• Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her

feet and legs in the floor area and does not support them on the dashboard.

• Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag.
• There should be no additional persons, animals or objects between an airbag and a person.
• Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear - do not attach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS devices or mobile phones.
• Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way.
• Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.
• Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or other objects to the front passenger seat that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.
• Do not place seat cushions or other objects on the front seats that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.
• Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.
• Never modify either the individual components or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
• Do not remove the airbag system.

Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.

Vehicle modifications for a person with disabilities may affect the air bag system; con-

tact MINI Customer Relations for further information.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag system

Safety information

Warning

Individual components can be hot after triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch individual components.

Warning

Improperly executed work can lead to failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the airbag system might not trigger as intended despite the accident severity. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct function

With the standby state switched on, the warning light in the instrument cluster lights up briefly, indicating the airbag system and belt tensioner are functional.

Airbag system malfunctioning

- Warning light does not come on when standby state is switched on.

- The warning light lights up continuously.

Automatic deactivation of the front-seat passenger airbags

Concept

The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's resistance.

Front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger's side are activated or deactivated.

General information

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, refer to the safety information and instructions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.

Safety information

Warning

To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag function, the system must be able to detect whether a person is sitting in the front passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system

When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator light goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear.

To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion.

• Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically determined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
• Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.
• Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.
• No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags

Top-down view of a car's front seat and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

The indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags.

The light indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated.

- The indicator light lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

- The indicator light does not light up when, for instance a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are activated.

Detected child restraint systems

The system generally detects children seated in a child restraint system, particularly in child restraint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child restraint system has been detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front-seat passenger airbag

The explosive power that activates driver's/front-seat passenger airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.

To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a relevant Check Control message is displayed. A message also appears on the Control Display.

Calibrating the front seats

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

An appropriate Check Control message is displayed.

1. Move the respective seat all the way forward.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. The seat moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.

The calibration procedure is completed when the Check Control message disappears.

If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

Concept

The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

General information

Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and, depending on the model, the tire temperature.

Further information and instructions on using the system can also be found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 227.

Functional requirements

The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

• After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.
• After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted to a new value, a reset was performed.
• Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.

Status display

Current status

The system status can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the system is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

The current status is displayed.

Tire conditions

General information

Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a SMS text message on the Control Display.

All wheels green

System is active and will issue a warning related to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

One to four yellow wheels

A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.

Gray wheels

It may not be possible to identify tire inflation pressure losses.

Possible causes:

• Malfunction.
• The system is being reset.

Additional information

The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures. The values shown are instantaneous measurements and may vary depending on driving style or weather conditions.

Resetting the system

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.

The wheels are displayed in gray and the following is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor...".

After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The resetting process is completed automatically while driving.

After successful completion of the reset, the tires appear in green on the Control Display and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for recommended pressures." is displayed.

You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes automatically.

Messages

General information

A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped

with normal tires. Follow the information on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check is required

Message

A symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Inflation was not carried out according to specifications.

The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset.

Measure

1. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
2. Reset the system.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a tire inflation pressure loss.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas station, check and correct the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, if necessary.
3. Reset the system.

If there is a significant loss of tire inflation pressure

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with the affected tire appears in a Check Control message on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.
   Run-flat tires, refer to page 233, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

1. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

Possible driving range with a depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driving range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

• Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
• Longer braking distances.
• Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits

Temperature

The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature.

Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire inflation pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again.

These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.

Sudden tire pressure loss

The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances.

Failure performing a reset

The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire is reported though tire inflation pressures are correct.

Malfunction

The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.

Examples and recommendations in the following situations:

• A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.
• Malfunction: have system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
• The system was unable to complete the reset. Perform a system reset again.
• Interference caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped

with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

Concept

The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differences between the individual wheels while driving.

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. The difference will be detected and reported as a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual inflation pressure in the tires.

Functional requirements

The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

• After a tire or wheel replacement, an initialization was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.
• After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new value, an initialization was performed.

Status display

The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization required

An initialization must be performed in the following situations:

• After the tire inflation pressure has been adjusted.
• After a tire or wheel replacement.

Performing initialization

When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Messages

General information

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information

on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.

Indication of a flat tire

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 233, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

1. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving range with a depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driving range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

• Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
• Longer braking distances.
• Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits

The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations:

- A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

• Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in advance.
• When the system has not been initialized.
• When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface.
• Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
• When driving with snow chains.

Intelligent Safety

Concept

Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance systems.

The intelligent safety systems can help prevent an imminent collision.

• Approach control warning with City light braking function, refer to page 153.
• Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation, refer to page 157.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air conditioner (no visible text or symbols)

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/off

Some Intelligent Safety systems are automatically active after every departure. Some Intelligent Safety systems activate according to the last setting.

Press button briefly:

- The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

- LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

- The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

- The LED goes out.

Approach control warning with city light braking function

Concept

The system may prevent some accidents. In the event of an accident, the system may reduce impact speed.

The system sounds a warning before an imminent collision and activates brakes independently, if needed.

The Brake Assistant function activates and applies the brakes with limited force and duration.

A camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system.

The approach control warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.

With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally, the approach control warning and braking are delayed in order to avoid false system reactions.

General information

The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings may vary with the current driving situation.

Braking is performed at speeds up to approximately 35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Top-down view of three cars on a road with a triangular light source, no text or symbols visible

Objects that the system can detect are taken into account.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and digital display (no visible text or symbols)

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

Front view of a car with a white upward arrow symbol on the windshield (no text or labels)

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active after every driving off.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

- The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

- LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

- The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

- The LED goes out.

Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via the Central Information Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
5. Select the desired setting.

The selected warning time is stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Warning with braking function

Display

A warning symbol appears in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision with a detected vehicle is imminent.

Symbol Measure

Symbol lights up red: prewarning.

Brake and increase distance.

Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning.

Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary.

Prewarning

This warning is provided, for instance when there is impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking as warranted.

Acute warning with braking function

An acute warning is displayed when there is an imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle approaching another object at a high speed.

The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking intervention in a possible risk of collision.

Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prior warning.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver to intervene. During a warning, the maximum braking force is used. In order to activate the Brake Assistant function, you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

The system's ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the

information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

Detection range

The system's detection potential is limited.

Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late.

The following situations may not be detected, for example:

• Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed.
• Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
• Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
• Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

• In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
• In tight curves.
• If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.
• If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
• Up to 10 seconds after activating the drive-ready state via the Start/Stop button.
• During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.
• If there are constant blinding effects because of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity

The more sensitive the warning settings are, the more warnings are displayed.

Therefore, there may also be an excess of

premature or unjustified warnings and reactions.

Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation

Concept

The system may prevent some accidents with pedestrians.

When driving at city speeds, the system will issue a warning if there is imminent risk of a collision with pedestrians, and support this with a light braking function.

The camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system.

General information

In sufficiently bright conditions, the system issues a warning of a possible risk of collision with pedestrians in the speed range from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h

The system reacts to people who are within the detection range of the system.

Detection range

graph TD
    A["Car"] --> B{Traffic Section}
    B -->|1| C["Exit"]
    B -->|2| D["Exit"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas:

• Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.
• Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left of the central area.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air conditioner (no visible text or symbols)

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

Front view of a car with an upward arrow symbol on the windshield (no text or labels)

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active after every driving off.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

- The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually

switched off according to their respective settings.

- LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

- The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

- The LED goes out.

Warning with braking function

Display

If a collision with a detected person is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver to intervene. During a warning, the maximum braking force is used. In order to activate the Brake Assistant function, you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

The system's ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

Detection range

The detection potential of the camera is limited.

Thus, a warning might not be issued or be issued late.

The following situations may not be detected, for example:

• Partially covered pedestrians.
• Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour.
• Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
• Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations:

• In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
• In tight curves.
• If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.
• If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
• Up to 10 seconds after activating the drive-ready state via the Start/Stop button.
  – During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.
• If there are constant blinding effects because of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.
• When it is dark outside.

Fatigue alert

Concept

The system can detect decreasing alertness or fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it is recommended that the driver takes a break.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing one's physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not be detected in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the

driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.

Function

The system is switched on each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off.

After travel has begun, the system monitors certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.

This procedure takes the following criteria into account:

- Personal driving style, for instance steering behavior.

- Driving conditions, for instance time, length of trip.

Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a recommendation to take a break.

Break recommendation

If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break.

A recommendation to take a break is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip.

After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approximately 45 minutes.

System limits

The function may be limited in the following situations and may issue an incorrect warning or no warning at all:

- When the clock is set incorrectly.

- When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43mph / 70km / h .

• With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
• In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently.
• When the road surface is poor.
• In the event of strong side winds.

The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a break during longer trips on highways.

PostCrash - iBrake

Concept

In the event of an accident, the system can bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without intervention by the driver in certain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof.

At standstill

After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.

Harder vehicle braking

In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake Assistant allows.

To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake. For a brief period, the braking pressure will be higher than the braking pressure that is achieved by the automatic braking function. This interrupts automatic braking.

Interrupting automatic braking

It can be necessary to interrupt automatic braking in certain situations, for instance for an evasive maneuver.

Interrupt automatic braking:

- By pressing the brake pedal.

- By pressing the accelerator pedal.

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Antilock Braking System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking.

The vehicle maintains its steering power even during full brake applications, which increases the active safety.

ABS is ready when vehicle is ready to drive.

Brake assistant

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically boosts the vehicle braking capability to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the braking distance to a minimum during an emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the capabilities provided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.

Energy recovery

General information

In the event of danger, such as with locked wheels, energy recovery is reduced in order to prevent unstable driving situations.

Safety information

Warning

Without energy recovery, there is no braking power of the electric motor available. The vehicle could roll further than anticipated. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

Concept

Within the physical limits, the system helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.

General information

DSC detects the following unstable driving conditions, for instance:

• Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
• Loss of traction of the front wheels, which can lead to understeering.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to page 163, is a version of the DSC where forward momentum is optimized.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

When driving with a roof load, for instance with roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's center of gravity is higher, which increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situations. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dynamic Stability Control when driving with roof load.

Indicator/warning lights

The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

General information

When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in curves.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

Press and hold this button but not longer than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the instrument cluster and displays DSC OFF.

DSC is switched off.

Activating DSC

Press the button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator light go out.

Indicator/warning lights

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The indicator light lights up: DSC is deactivated.

Automatic activation

When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation occurs in the following situations:

- The vehicle has a flat tire.

- When activating cruise control in the TRACTION or DSC OFF settings.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Concept

DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability Control where forward momentum is optimized.

The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions, for instance unplowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces, but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.

When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maximum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves.

Drive carefully.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:

• When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads.
• When driving off from deep snow or loose ground.
• When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Activating DTC

Press the button.

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up.

Deactivating DTC

Press the button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator light go out.

Performance Control

Performance Control enhances the agility of the vehicle.

To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked individually when a sporty driving style is used.

MINI Driving Modes switch

Concept

The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features. Choose between four different programs. Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch will activate the particular program.

Operating the programs

Switch Program

SPORT

GREEN

SPORT

MID

GREEN

GREEN+

MID

MID provides balanced tuning.

With each starting operation, MID is activated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

Concept

GREEN provides consumption reducing tuning for increased range.

Activating GREEN

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch upward or downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activate GREEN.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure GREEN"
5. Select the desired setting.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

GREEN+

Concept

GREEN provides consistent tuning to maximize range.

During the activation, some comfort functions will also be limited or deactivated.

Activating GREEN+

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch upward or downward until GREEN+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.

SPORT

Concept

Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for greater driving agility.

Activating SPORT

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch upward or downward until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring driving program

Settings can be made for the following driving programs in Driving mode:

• GREEN, refer to page 164.
• SPORT, refer to page 165.

Displays

Program selection

SPORT MID GREEN

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch displays a list of programs, which can be selected.

Selected program

The instrument cluster displays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant

Concept

This system supports driving off on uphill grades. The parking brake is not required.

Driving off with the drive-off assistant

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic

Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steering function.

The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance, and makes steering firmer when driving at faster speeds.

Furthermore, the steering force adapts according to the driving program, so that a firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Cruise control

Concept

Using this system, a desired speed can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed. The system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed.

General information

The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Depending on the settings, the cruise control settings many change under certain conditions.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

The use of the system can lead to an increased risk of accidents in the following situations, for instance:

- On winding roads.

- In heavy traffic.

- On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet conditions, or on a loose road surface.

There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 168.

Store speed, refer to page 168.

Pause cruise control, refer to page 168.

Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 169.

Increase speed, refer to page 168.

Reduce speed, refer to page 168.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as the speed limit.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Switching off

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

When active, press the button on the steering wheel.

Interrupting automatically

The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

• When the driver applies the brakes.
• When selector lever position D is disengaged.
• Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
• If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press +or button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

The stored speed is displayed in the instrument cluster.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press the button.

Changing the speed

+ or —button: press until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

• or button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
• or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
• or button: press button to resistance point and hold. The vehicle accelerates or decelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Continuing cruise control

General information

An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unintentional braking or accelerating may occur.

Calling up the stored speed

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The stored speed is reached again and maintained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator light

The indicator in the instrument cluster lights up: the system is switched on.

Desired speed and stored speed

The desired speed is displayed together with the symbol.

- Display lights up green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.

- Display lights up gray: system is interrupted, the display indicates the stored speed.

- No display: system is switched off.

System limits

Engine power

The desired speed is also maintained downhill, but may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.

PDC Park Distance Control

Concept

PDC is a support when parking. The system detects objects behind the vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in front of the vehicle are detected too. Objects that you are approaching slowly are indicated by signal tones and a visual display.

General information

The ultrasound sensors for measuring the distances are located in the bumpers.

The delete range, depending on obstacles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given in the following situations:

- By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object.

- By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.

- When a collision is imminent.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi-

cle surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance Control is activated, the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control is not yet active.

Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

Close-up of a car dashboard with five white plastic pushbuttons and a central button (no text or symbols visible)

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, for instance in the bumpers.

Functional requirements

Ensure full functionality:

- Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers, bicycle racks or similar.

- Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system switches on automatically in the following situations:

- If selector lever position R is engaged while drive-ready state is switched on. The rearview camera also switches on.

- With front PDC: when obstacles are detected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

With front PDC: automatic activation on obstacle detection can be switched off. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Parking"

4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending on the vehicle equipment.

5. "Automatic PDC activation" The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel

The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.

- On: the LED lights up.

- Off: the LED goes out.

The rearview camera image is displayed if the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button.

Depending on the equipment version, the system cannot be switched off manually if the reverse gear is engaged.

Warning

Signal tones

An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals.

When the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.

With front PDC: when objects are simultaneously located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded.

Volume

The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the entertainment volume can be adjusted.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Tone"

4. "Volume settings"

5. "PDC"

6. Set the desired value.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Control Display before a signal sounds.

A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented in colors: red, green and yellow.

When the image of the rearview camera is displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, for instance under the following conditions:

- For small children and animals.

- For persons with certain clothing, for instance coats.

- With external interference of the ultrasound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines.

- When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.

- If cargo protrudes.

- Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.

• With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.
• With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
• With moving objects.
• With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.
• With objects with corners and sharp edges.
• With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences.
• For objects with porous surfaces.
• Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

False warnings

The system may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range:

• In heavy rain.
• When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice.
• When sensors are covered in snow.
• On rough road surfaces.
• On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
• In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, for instance in underground garages.
• In automatic vehicle washes.
• Due to heavy exhaust.
• Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.

The malfunction is signaled by a continuous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultrasound sources is no longer present, the system is again fully functional. With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detection, for instance in vehicle washes; see Switching on/off.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Red symbol is displayed, and the range of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Rearview camera

Concept

The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Depending on the vehicle equipment: button in the vehicle

Close-up of a car dashboard with five white circular buttons and a central white sphere (no text or symbols visible)

Park assistance button

Camera

Close-up of a car's rear bumper with the Mini logo and an arrow pointing to a button (no text or symbols beyond the logo)

The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If necessary, clean the camera lens.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically switched on if selector lever position R is engaged when the drive-ready state is switched on.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel

The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.

• On: the LED lights up.
• Off: the LED goes out.

The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display.

Switching the view via the Central Information Display (CID)

If the rearview camera view is not displayed, change the view via the Central Information Display (CID):

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirements

• The rearview camera is switched on.
• The tailgate is fully closed.
• Keep the recording range of the camera clear.

Protruding cargo or carrier systems that are not connected to a trailer power socket can lead to malfunctions.

Activating assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be active at the same time.

- Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"

Lanes and turning radius lines are indicated.

- Obstacle marking

P_G "Obstacle marking"

Obstacles are marked, depending on the vehicle equipment.

Pathway lines

Aerial view of a long elevated road with parallel tracks, no visible text or symbols.

Pathway lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.

Pathway lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads.

Pathway lines depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.

Turning radius lines

Exterior view of a modern office building (no signage)

Turning radius lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.

Turning radius lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road.

Only one turning radius line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.

Obstacle marking

Close-up of two vertical cylindrical components mounted on a curved surface with a grid pattern below (no text or symbols visible)

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera.

The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Control.

Parking using pathway and turning radius lines

1. Position the vehicle so that the turning radius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

Pure architectural line drawing of a road with diagonal and horizontal supports (no text or symbols)

1. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning radius line.

3D-rendered abstract geometric shapes on a plain background (no text or symbols)

Display settings

Brightness

With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is reached and press the Controller.

Contrast

With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is reached and press the Controller.

System limits

Detection of objects

Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be recognized by the system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, some assistance functions also consider data from the PDC Park Distance Control.

Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Control chapter.

The objects displayed on the Control Display may be closer than they appear. There-

fore, do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.

Parking assistant

Concept

Top-down view of a multi-lane road with cars and a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road.

General information

Parking assistant handling is divided into three steps:

• Switching on and activating.
• Parking space search.
• Parking.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

The parking assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure.

System status and instructions on required actions are displayed on the Control Display.

A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

NOTICE

The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to property. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

The safety information of the PDC Park Distance Control applies in addition.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Close-up of a car's front bumper with multiple white filter knobs and adjustment knobs (no text or symbols visible)

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

Close-up of a car's front wheel and tire, with a white arrow pointing to the wheel edge (no text or symbols visible)

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the wheel housing.

Functional requirements

Ultrasound sensors

Ensure full functionality:

• Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers.
• Keep the sensors clean and unob- structed.

For measuring parking spaces

• Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.
• Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space

• Gaps behind an object that has a min. length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
• Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
• Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m.
• Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking

- Doors and tailgate are closed.

• The parking brake is released.
• When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be switched on.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button

Press the park assistance button. The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with reverse gear

Shift into reverse.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

To activate: P"Parking Assistant"

Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available.

White: the system is available but not activated.

The system is activated.

Parking space search and system status

(P)

- Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking assistant is activated and the parking space search is active.

- Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted.

- The parking procedure is

active. The system takes over the steering.

- Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

Parking

1. Press the park assistance button or shift into reverse gear to switch on the parking assistant, refer to page 177. Activate the parking assistant, if needed.
   Parking assistant is activated.

1. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h

and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.

The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed on the display, refer to page 177.

1. Follow the instructions on the display.

The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is indicated on the display.

1. Adjust the parking position yourself, if needed.

Interrupting manually

The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time:

- Press the park assistance button.

- "Parking Assistant"

Interrupting automatically

The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations:

• If the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering.
• If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the display.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6mph / 10km / h .
• Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces.
• If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
• If the PDC Park Distance Control displays clearances that are too small.
• When switching into other functions of the radio.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Resuming

An interrupted parking procedure can be continued, if needed.

Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to page 177, and follow the instructions on the display.

Switching off

The system can be switched off as follows:

- Press the park assistance button.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

No parking assistance

The parking assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations:

- In tight curves.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

• On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.
• On slippery ground.

• With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space.

• With a mounted emergency wheel.

• With ditches or edges, for instance an edge of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, for instance under the following conditions:

• For small children and animals.
• For persons with certain clothing, for instance coats.
• With external interference of the ultrasound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines.
• When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.

- If cargo protrudes.

- Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.

- With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

- With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

- With moving objects.

- With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.

- With objects with corners and sharp edges.

- With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences.

- For objects with porous surfaces.

- Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

- The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Tire size

The parking position may vary depending on the tire size.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Climate control

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the following components:

- Emission tested passenger compartment.

- Microfilter.

- Air conditioning system to control the temperature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.

Depending on the equipment specification:

- Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

- Automatic climate control.

- Stationary climate control.

Automatic climate control

1 2 3 4 5 AUTO OFF 6 7 MAX A/C MAX A/C 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

1 Temperature, left
2 Display
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity
4 AUTO program
5 Air distribution, manual
6 Display
7 Temperature, right
8 Seat heating, right 87

9 Maximum cooling
10 Air conditioning
11 Recirculated-air mode
12 Rear window defroster
13 To defrost windows and remove condensation
14 Seat heating, left 87

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn wheel for air flow to the left until the control switches off.

Temperature

Concept

The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible, if

necessary by using the maximum cooling or heating power, and then keeps it constant.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.

Do not rapidly switch between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can be cooled with activated drive-ready or standby state.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air conditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when drive-ready state is switched on.

The cooling function is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 210, develops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is normal.

Maximum cooling

Concept

The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.

General information

The function is available with external temperatures above approx. 32 ^/0 ^ and with the drive-ready state switched on.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this.

The air flow can be adjusted with the program active.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the system switched on.

AUTO program

Concept

The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats the car's interior automatically.

The air distribution and temperature are controlled automatically depending on the temperature in the car's interior and the desired temperature setting including the selected intensity of the air flow.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the AUTO program switched on.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the floor area.

Point the side vents toward the side windows.

The following features are switched on automatically with the AUTO program:

- The air conditioning, refer to page 182.

To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribution.

Intensity

With the AUTO program activated, the automatic intensity control can be changed.

Turn the ring to set the desired intensity from soft to intensive.

The set intensity is displayed via the position of the illuminated LED segment.

Recirculated-air mode

Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.

Operation

Press the button:

The LED is illuminated when recirculated-air mode is switched on. The supply of outside air is shut off.

When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh air is directed into the vehicle's interior.

To prevent window condensation, recirculated-air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the external temperature.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and window fogging increases.

If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.

Adjusting the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually.

General information

To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO program first.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the desired air flow.

The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via illuminated LED segments.

The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Adjusting the air distribution manually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation

Press the button repeatedly to select a program:

- Windows, upper body region, and floor area.

- Upper body region and floor area.

• Floor area.
• Windows and floor area.
• Windows.
• Windows and upper body region.
• Upper body region.

To defrost windows and remove condensation

Concept

Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side windows.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the

system switched on.

The air flow can be adjusted with the program active.

If there is window condensation, switch on the air conditioning too.

Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heating output is reduced.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

In external and recirculated-air mode, the microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 248.

Ventilation

Setting

The air flow directions can be individually adjusted:

- Direct ventilation:

The air flow is directly pointed onto the person. The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending on the adjusted temperature.

- Indirect ventilation:

If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air is directly routed into the car's interior.

Front ventilation

Close-up of a car wheel with directional arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

• Turn knob for continuous opening and closing of the vents.
• Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the vent flow, arrows.

Stationary climate control

Concept

Stationary climate control cools or heats the car's interior prior to departure to a comfortable temperature.

The system automatically cools, vents, or heats depending on the internal and external temperature. Snow and ice may be removed more easily.

General information

The stationary climate control can be switched on and off directly or via a preset departure time:

• Direct operation, refer to page 185.
• Preselected departure times, refer to page 185.

The air automatically exits through the vents to the windshield, the side windows, the upper body region and into the floor area.

The system switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

If stationary climate control is used during the charging process, less air conditioning capacity will be required while driving. This optimizes the range.

Functional requirements

• Drive-ready state deactivated.
• High-voltage battery sufficiently charged or charging cable connected.

If the high-voltage battery is heavily discharged, it can take some time after connecting the charging cable, until the stationary climate control will be functional.

- Direct operation or departure time pre-selected: depends on internal, external, and set desired temperature.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

- To ensure the minimum range of the vehicle, the stationary climate control may be automatically switched off, for instance after repeated activation or due to an insufficient state of charge of the high-voltage battery. After the stationary climate control is switched off due to an insufficient state of charge, charge the high-voltage battery and switch the

drive-ready state on and off. The stationary climate control is available again.

- The vents are open to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly

Concept

The system can be switched on or off directly.

The system switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

The system can be switched on or off via the Central Information Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Activate now"

Climate control for departure time

Concept

Different departure times can be set to ensure a comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at the time of departure.

The activation time is automatically determined based on the temperature.

The system promptly switches on before the selected departure time.

The departure time is preselected in two steps:

• Set departure times.
• Activate departure times.

Setting the departure time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
6. Set the desired departure time, refer to page 225.

Activating the departure time

If a departure time is to influence the switching on of the stationary climate control, the respective departure time must be activated first.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Activate comfort climate"

5. "Plan comfort climate"

6. "Precondition for departure"

7. Activate the desired departure time.

The symbol on the automatic climate control lights up when the departure time is activated.

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes when the stationary climate control has been switched on.

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Integrated Universal Remote Control

Concept

The integrated Universal Remote Control in the interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives, barriers, or lighting systems.

General information

The Integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.

If possible, do not install the antenna of the remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door drive, near metal objects to ensure the best possible operation.

Safety information

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled systems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may result in injury, for example, body parts becoming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.

Compatibility

If this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the owner's manual of the system to be controlled, the system is generally compatible with the integrated Universal Remote Control.

Additional questions are answered by:

- A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

- www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

Overview

1 2 3

1 LED
2 Programmable keys
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General information

The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be fully charged at the time of programming to ensure an optimal range of the integrated universal remote control.

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green rapidly. This erases all programming of the buttons on the interior mirror.

1. Press the interior mirror button to be programmed. The LED on the interior mirror will slowly begin flashing orange.
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.
3. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter. Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

1. • The LED lights up green: programming completed.

Release the button.

- The LED flashes fast: programming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mirror for 2 seconds and release. Perform this procedure three times to complete the programming procedure.

If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, continue with the special features for change code wireless systems.

- LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not completed.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

To program other functions on other buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

Special feature of the rolling code wireless system

If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features a rolling code radio system.

Refer to the owner's manual for the system.

For systems with a rolling code radio system, the integrated Universal Remote Control and the system also have to be synchronized.

Please read the owner's manual to find out how to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person.

Synchronizing the universal remote control with the system:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed, e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, release the button.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 ~cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter. Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. The LED can light up in different ways.
7. The LED lights up green: the programming procedure is completed. Release the button.

- The LED flashes fast: the hand-held transmitter was detected but programming is not complete. Press the button on the interior mirror for 2 seconds and release. Perform this procedure three times to complete the programming procedure. If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, continue with the special features for change code wireless systems.

- LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not completed.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

If the programming procedure is not completed, the previous programming will remain unchanged.

Operation

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled systems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may result in injury, for example, body parts becoming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior mirror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions

All stored functions will be deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror flashes green rapidly.

Digital compass

Overview

2 NH 1

1 Control button
2 Mirror display

Mirror display

The compass shows the current driving direction.

Operating concept

Various functions can be called up by pressing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the control button is pressed:

• Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
• 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
• 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
• 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering setting.
• 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the vehicle so that the compass operates correctly; refer to World map with compass zones.

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure

1. Press and hold the control button for approx. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the control button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corresponds with your location appears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The compass is ready for use again after approximately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass

The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following:

• The wrong compass point is displayed.
• The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direction of travel.
• Not all points of the compass are displayed.

Procedure

1. Make sure that there are no large metallic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for approx. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph / 7 km / h . If calibration is successful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.

Left/right-hand steering

The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language

Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the

control button again to switch between English "E" and German "O".

Settings are stored automatically after approximately 10 seconds.

Sun visor

Glare shield

To provide protection against glare, fold the sun visor down or pivot it to the side.

Vanity mirror

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover.

When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on.

Front passenger side dash- board

Decorative trim

Close-up of a car's front dashboard and side grille (no visible text or symbols)

Customized decorative trim panels for the dashboard on the front passenger side are available as original MINI accessories depending on the equipment specification.

Follow the assembly instructions.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Overview

Close-up of a car gear shift lever showing the shaft and keyway (no text or symbols visible)

The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the center console.

Ashtray

In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ashtray from the cup holder.

Cigarette lighter

Safety information

Warning

Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage to property. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that children do not use the cigarette lighter.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

Operation

Push in the cigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Sockets

Concept

The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment when standby and drive-ready state are switched on.

General information

The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.

Do not damage the socket by using non-compatible connectors.

Safety information

Warning

Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior during unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

In the center console

Close-up of a car gear shift lever and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the cargo area

Close-up of a car's front camera and dashboard with illuminated light source (no visible text or symbols)

The socket is located on the right side in the cargo area.

USB port

General information

Follow the information regarding the connection of mobile devices to the USB port in the section on USB connections, refer to page 55.

In the center console

Close-up of a black automotive seat panel with control knobs and a white arrow pointing to the bottom panel (no visible text or symbols)

Depending on the equipment version, a USB port Type A or a USB port Type A and a USB port Type C are located in the front of the center console.

Properties of upper USB port:

- USB port Type A.

- For charging mobile devices and for data transfer.

- Charge current: max. 1.5 A.

Properties of lower USB port:

• USB port Type C.
• For charging mobile devices and for data transfer.
• Charge current: max. 3 A.

Wireless charging tray

Concept

The wireless charging tray enables the following functions to be performed without cables:

• Charging the rechargeable battery of a mobile phone with Qi capability and of other mobile devices, which support the Qi standard.
• Connect the mobile phone to the external antenna.

Depending on the country, this provides for better network reception and a consistent reproduction quality.

General information

When inserting the mobile phone, make sure there are no objects between it and the wireless charging tray.

During charging, the surface of the tray and the mobile phone may become warm.

Higher temperatures may lead to a reduction in the charge current through the mobile phone, and in isolated cases the charging process is paused temporarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the mobile phone owner's manual.

NOTE

This device has been tested for human exposure limits and found compliant at a minimum distance of 4 in/10 cm during operation.

Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be maintained in every direction when operating the device.

Top-down view of a car interior showing seat compartments and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Mounting position of the product.

Safety information

Warning

When charging a device that meets the Qi standard in the wireless charging tray, any metal objects located between the device and the tray can become very hot. Placing storage devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal transmission, between the device and the tray may impair the card function. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. When charging mobile devices, make sure there are no objects between the device and the tray.

NOTICE

The tray is intended for mobile phones up to a particular size. Forceful inserting of the mobile phone into the tray can damage the tray or the mobile phone. There is a risk of damage to property. Observe the maximum dimensions for mobile phones. Do not force the mobile phone into the tray.

Functional requirements

- Ignition or standby state is switched on.

- The mobile phone must compatibly support the required Qi standard. Compatible mobile phones, refer to page 53. If the mobile phone does not support the Qi standard, the mobile phone can be charged using a special Qi-compatible charging case.

- Use only protective jackets and covers up to a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm. Otherwise, the charging function may be impaired.

- The mobile phone must not exceed the maximum size of approximately 5.9 x 3.07 x 0.62 in/150 x 78 x 16 mm.

Overview

The wireless charging tray is located in the center armrest.

1 2 3

1 Front holder with LED

2 Storage area

3 Movable clamp

Inserting the mobile phone

1. Open center armrest, refer to vehicle Owner's Manual.

2. Push back the clamp.

3. Insert the mobile phone with the display facing upward in the direction of the front holder, arrow 1.

Close-up of a car's front bumper showing a smartphone mounted on the hood with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Place the mobile phone in the storage area, arrow 2.
2. Push the clamp forward and clamp the mobile phone in the tray.
3. Close the center armrest.

Removing the mobile phone

1. Open the center armrest.
2. Push the clamp back and remove the mobile phone.

LED displays

Color Meaning

Blue The mobile phone is charging. Depending on the model, the blue LED is no longer illuminated once the inserted mobile phone with Qi capability is fully charged.
Orange	The mobile phone is not charging.Temperature on the mobile phone possibly too high or foreign object in the charging tray.
Red The mobile phone is not charging.Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits

At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile phone may be limited and some functions may no longer work.

LTE-Compensator - Information and User Manual

Your car is equipped with a wireless charging tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and connect it to the mobile network. To ensure the best possible connection a signal booster (LTE-Compensator) is used in conjunction with the WCA. The following paragraphs refer to this booster:

This is a CONSUMER device.

BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DEVICE with your wireless provider and have your provider's consent. Most wireless providers consent to the use of Compensators. Some providers may not consent to the use of this device on their network. If you

are unsure, contact your provider. You MUST operate this device with approved antennas and cables as specified by the manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You MUST cease operating this device immediately if requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless service provider. Warning E911 location information may not be provided or may be inaccurate for calls served by using this device.

Please observe additionally the following information

• Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to register their signal boosters by calling their toll-free number.
• T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mobile.com/BoosterRegistration); (https://saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/SignalBooster#).
• Verizon's online registration link: (http://www.verizonwireless.com/wcms/consumer/register-signal-booster.html).
• AT&T online registration link (https://securec45.securewebsession.com/attsignalbooster.com/).
• U.S.Cellular online registration link (http://www.uscellular.com/uscellular/support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp).

Before use you must register your booster device with your wireless provider.

If you should be requested by the FCC to cease operating your booster, you are not allowed to insert your mobile phone in the charging tray anymore unless the booster is permanently deactivated by your local MINI dealer.

You must not remove the booster from the car nor use it with any other than the preinstalled coupling device or antenna. Any modification of the existing antenna or coupling device as well as the use of other an-

tennas or coupling devices will cause the cease of the booster's operating license.

The booster device fulfills the network protection standards as required by the FCC, such as intermodulation limits, oscillation detection and gain limits.

Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive

Model Number: LTECOMPBO

Part Number: 6803145-01

FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

NOTICE

Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can damage the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.

Overview

The following storage compartments are available in the car's interior:

• Glove compartment on the front passenger side.
• Compartments in the doors.
• Storage compartment in the center arm-rest.
• Storage compartment in front of the cup holders.
• Clothes hooks
• Storage tray in the center console.
• Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.

Glove compartment

Safety information

Warning

Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove compartment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compartment immediately after using it.

Opening

Interior view of a car dashboard and infotainment system (no visible text or symbols)

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Closing

Fold up the cover.

Compartments in the doors

General information

There are storage compartments in the doors.

Safety information

Warning

Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an accident or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any breakable objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage compartments.

Center armrest

General information

The center armrest contains a storage compartment.

Opening

Close-up of a car's seatbelt mechanism with directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm-rest upward, arrow 2.

Adjusting the height

Close-up of a car seatbelt mechanism with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Press button, arrow 1, and swing center armrest upward or downward into the desired height, arrow 2.

Cup holders

Safety information

Warning

Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the car's interior in the event of an accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled liquids can distract from the traffic conditions and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages.

Front

Close-up of a black and white robotic hand crank driving a car gear shift lever (no text or symbols visible)

In the center console.

Rear

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and seatbelt (no visible text or symbols)

In front of the back seats and in the side armrests.

Clothes hooks

General information

The clothes hooks are located above the side windows in the rear.

Safety information

Warning

Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk of accident. When suspending clothing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver's view.

Warning

Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects, for instance clothing articles, from the clothes hooks.

Cargo area

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Loading

Safety information

Warning

High gross weight can overheat the tires, damage them internally and cause a sudden drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics may be negatively impacted, reducing lane stability, lengthening the braking distances and changing the steering response. There is a risk of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load capacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross weight.

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Warning

Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly.

NOTICE

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)

1. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
2. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

+ ≦ Max. Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo

• Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
• Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.
• Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

• If necessary, fold down the rear back-rests to stow large cargo.

• Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.

• Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet straps or draw straps.
• Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo straps.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

2 2 1 N 1 2

Without storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are two lashing eyes, arrow 1, in the cargo area.

With storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are six lashing eyes, arrows 1 and 2, in the cargo area.

Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Cargo cover

General information

When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is raised.

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Removing

For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can be removed.

1. Detach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.
2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on the left and right.

Interior view of a car showing a back panel with a white arrow pointing to the rear portion of the seat (no text or symbols visible)

Installing

1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizontally into the two side brackets until it audibly engages.
2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.

Storage space under cargo floor panel

Top-down view of a vehicle or vehicle chassis with a white rectangular panel and a white arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

Located under the cargo floor panel on the right side is a trough for the onboard vehicle tool kit.

Fold the right side of the cargo floor panel upward to remove the onboard vehicle tool kit.

Enlarging the cargo area

Concept

The cargo area can be enlarged as follows:

• The rear seat backrests can be folded down.
• The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position using the cargo setting.

General information

The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat backrest is connected to the center section.

The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the rear.

Safety information

Warning

Danger of jamming with folding down the backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down.

Warning

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured cargo can be thrown about the car's interior; for instance, in the event of an accident, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after folding it back.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Folding down the rear seat backrest from the rear

1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded down, hook the corresponding safety belt into the belt buckle on the side.
2. Pull the lever up, arrow 1, and fold the rear seat backrest forward, arrow 2.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Cargo position

Concept

The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position.

Adjusting

1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.
2. Fold the frame up until it engages.

Close-up of a car seatbelt mechanism with a white arrow pointing to the component (no text or symbols visible)

1. Fold back and engage the rear seat backrest.

Folding back the backrest

Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not

caught behind the backrest or in between the backrest and the rear seats.

The red marking on the lever disappears completely.

Variable cargo area floor

Concept

With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo area can be configured corresponding to transport requirements.

General information

Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to page 201.

Removing the cargo floor panel

Interior view of a car showing the rear compartment of a vehicle with a white plastic tray on the back (no visible text or symbols)

Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold slightly upward. Next, pull it backward from the supports.

The cargo floor panel can be removed from the cargo area above the tail lights.

Lower position

Interior view of a car showing the rear compartment of a vehicle with a white plastic sheet inside (no text or symbols visible)

- Larger objects can be transported. - Space for smaller objects remains between the fixed and variable cargo area floor.

Folded up position

Safety information

Warning

Improper use of the variable cargo floor panel can lead to a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property.

• Do not use the variable cargo floor panel to separate the cargo area and car's interior in the sense of a partition net.
• Only use the variable cargo floor panel in the folded-up position when the backrests are folded up and locked.
• Fold down the variable cargo floor panel before driving off.
• Always secure cargo against shifting, using straps, belts and lashing eyes, for instance.

Fold up the cargo floor panel

Interior view of a car showing the hood and engine compartment with a white arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower position and push it behind the locks, arrow. You've reached the maximum cargo height.

Upper position

Interior view of a car showing the rear compartment of a vehicle with a white plastic panel on the back (no visible text or symbols)

• With the backrests folded down, a long, flat loading surface is produced.
• Maximum load in this position: 330 lbs/150 kg.
• Space for objects remains between the fixed and variable cargo area floor.

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Breaking-in period

General information

Moving parts need to begin working together smoothly.

The following instructions will help you to achieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.

Safety information

Warning

Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a delay. There is a risk of accident. After installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conservatively and intervene early if necessary. Observe the break-in procedures of the respective parts and components.

Tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brandnew; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately during this break-in period.

Following part replacement

The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Closing the tailgate

Safety information

Warning

An open tailgate protrudes from the vehicle and can endanger occupants and other traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.

Driving with the tailgate open

If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided:

- Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

• Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
• Drive moderately.

Ice on window glass

NOTICE

The window will be lowered slightly when pulling on the door handle. In the event of frost, the window may freeze up and not be lowered. There is a risk of damage to property. When pulling on the door handle, make sure that the window is lowered. If necessary, remove snow and ice from the window. Do not open the door with force.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

Warning

Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can influence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mobile phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. If possible, in the car's interior use only mobile phones with direct connections to an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual interference and deflect the radiation from the car's interior.

Hydroplaning

On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Driving through water

General information

When driving through water, follow the following:

• Drive through calm water only.
• Drive through water only if it is not deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
• Drive through water no faster than walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Safety information

NOTICE

When driving too quickly through too deep water, water can enter into the engine compartment, the electrical system or the transmission. There is a risk of damage to property. When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum indicated water level and the maximum speed for driving through water.

Braking safely

General information

The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Braking System ABS as a standard feature.

Perform an emergency stop in situations that require such.

Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Objects in the area around the pedals

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions

When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gently press the brake pedal every few miles.

Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic.

The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

Hills

General information

The braking effect of the drive system can be influenced through the energy recovery.

Safety information

Warning

Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system.

Warning

In idle state or with drive-ready state switched off, safety-relevant functions, for instance drive system braking effect, braking force boost and steering assistance, are restricted or not available at all. There is a risk of accident. Do not drive in idle state or with drive-ready state switched off.

Brake disc corrosion

Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination on the brake pads are increased by the following circumstances:

• Low mileage.
• Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all.
• Infrequent use of the brakes.
• Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning agents.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their response - generally this cannot be corrected.

Condensation water under the parked vehicle

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops and collects underneath the vehicle.

Ground clearance

NOTICE

If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g., curbs or underground garage entrances, contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler, and the underbody may occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that there is sufficient ground clearance available.

Roof-mounted luggage rack

General information

Installation only possible with roof rack.

Roof racks are available as special accessories.

Mounting

Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.

Loading

Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loading and driving:

• Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.
• Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
• Distribute the roof load uniformly.

• The roof load should not extend past the loading area.

• Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom.

• Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance using ratchet straps.
• Do not let objects project into the opening path of the tailgate.
• Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac- celeration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Driving on racetracks

Warning

The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport or motor sport type competition. There is a risk of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type competitions.

Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This wear is not covered by the warranty.

Increasing range

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The vehicle contains comprehensive technologies for reducing energy consumption and for maximizing the range.

The range depends on a number of different factors, refer to page 125.

The implementation of certain measures, driving style and regular maintenance can increasing the range and thereby also reduce the environmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight reduces the range.

Remove attached parts following use

Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerodynamics and increase the energy consumption.

Close the windows and glass sunroof

Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and thereby reduces the range.

Tires

General information

Tires can affect energy consumption in various ways, for instance energy consumption can be influenced by tire size.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly

Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling resistance and thus raises energy consumption and tire wear.

Stationary climate control

Run advance climate control, refer to page 184, in the vehicle during charging before driving off.

Heating and cooling operations are very energy intensive and substantially reduce the electric range.

Look well ahead when driving

Driving smoothly and proactively reduces energy consumption.

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.

By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you.

Longer braking procedures result in more efficient charging of the high-voltage battery via energy recovery from braking.

Use accelerator pedal for deceleration and coasting

When approaching a red light, use accelerator pedal for decelerating.

For going downhill use coasting function; for this purpose, press accelerator pedal just enough that the vehicle rolls.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and reduce the range, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.

Switch off these functions if they are not needed.

The GREEN and GREEN+ driving modes support the energy-conserving use of comfort features. They automatically perform a partial or complete deactivation of these functions.

Have maintenance carried out

Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. MINI recommends that maintenance work be performed by a MINI service center.

Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer to page 248.

Using eDRIVE efficiently

Concept

eDRIVE operates automatically. Proactive driving utilizes energy consumption and energy recovery optimally. Energy recovery is used to charge the high-voltage battery. Energy recovery is important for the supply of electrical components and thus a prerequisite for a long range. Energy consumption and recovery depend very much, among other things, on your driving style.

Optimizing driving style

Performance display

Your driving style can be optimized using the performance display.

The energy recovery occurs during coasting and braking and is displayed in the performance display by the accelerator pedal indicator.

The accelerator pedal indicator is within the CHARGE range.

Efficient energy recovery:

• The accelerator pedal moves in the yellow range of the CHARGE display, arrow 1.
• The energy use while driving can be optimized by efficient acceleration.

Set high energy recovery, refer to page 106, to recover as much energy as possible.

Efficient acceleration:

• The accelerator pedal moves in the yellow range of the ePOWER display, arrow 2.
• Use deceleration by coasting as often as possible for energy recovery.

Discharge of the high-voltage battery

General information

Longer idle periods, refer to page 266, can reduce the charge state of the high-voltage battery.

Safety information

NOTICE

The high-voltage battery can be damaged if left uncharged or with low charge for extended periods. There is a risk of damage to property. Before storing the vehicle for an extended period, ensure that the high-voltage battery is fully charged. During the idle period, connect the vehicle to a charging station at a compatible charging location. If necessary, the high-voltage battery will be charged automatically. Make sure that charging is carried out. Regularly check the charge state.

Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longer than four weeks with a charge state below approx. 80 %.

GREEN Mode

Concept

GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves on consumption. For this purpose, the engine control and comfort features, for instance the climate control output, are adjusted.

In addition, context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an efficient driving style.

General information

The system includes the following MINIMALISM functions and MINIMALISM displays:

• GREEN Limit, refer to page 215
• GREEN climate control, refer to page 215.
• GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to page 215.
• MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to page 216.

Activating GREEN Mode

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activating GREEN Mode.

2. "Configure GREEN"

3. Select the desired setting.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Configure GREEN"
4. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating the functions

The following functions can be activated/deactivated:

• "GREEN speed warning"
• "GREEN climate control"
• "Coasting"

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

GREEN Limit

- "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit is activated.

A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.

- "Tip at:"

Set the desired speed for the GREEN Limit.

When GREEN+ is activated, the GREEN Limit is set to 55 mph/90 km/h.

GREEN climate control

Climate control is set to be efficient.

By making a slight change to the set temperature and adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior consumption can be economized.

The power output to the seat heater and exterior mirror is reduced.

GREEN potential savings

Shows potential savings with the current settings in percentages.

Display in the instrument cluster

GREEN tip, driving instruction

General information

The GREEN tip indicates that your driving style can be modified to be more efficient, for example by backing off the accelerator.

Activating/deactivating the display

Activate information relating to the driving style and GREEN tips in the instrument cluster using the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "GREEN info"

GREEN tip, symbols

An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed.

Symbol Measure

For an efficient driving style, look well ahead when driving, accelerate conservatively, and delay accelerating.

Reduce speed to the selected GREEN speed.

Indications on the Control Display

Displaying MINIMALISM information

The current efficiency of the functions in GREEN Mode can be displayed on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM"

Information is shown on the following functions:

• Auto Start/Stop function.
• Energy recovery.

MINIMALISM analyzer

Concept

In this situation, the function helps develop an especially efficient driving style and to save energy.

For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display.

This display will help you adjust your driving style and save some energy.

Functional requirement

This function is available in GREEN Mode.

Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"

Display on the Control Display

The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer consists of a fish in a water glass and a value table.

The fish and the movements of the water in the bowl symbolize the efficiency of the driving style.

Depending on the equipment, the fish is shown with efficient and inefficient driving style or only with inefficient driving style.

The more efficient the driving style, the less the water sloshes around in the bowl and the better is the fish's mood. If the driving style is inefficient, the water oscillates, the fish's mood worsens, and a reduced number of stars is displayed.

The table of values contains stars and evaluates the driving style in different categories. The more efficient the driving style, the more stars are displayed in the table.

To assist with an efficient driving style, GREEN tips are displayed while driving.

Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Increasing the range, refer to page 212.

Charging the vehicle

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept

The vehicle can be charged using various charging cables at charging stations or household sockets. Control and monitoring of the charging process are handled completely automatically. The charge current strength can be set via the Central Information Display (CID).

General information

High-voltage battery

The high-voltage battery is used as an energy accumulator. The high-voltage battery can be charged by energy recovery during the trip or via the power grid.

In order to operate the high-voltage battery optimally, charge the vehicle regularly and fully using a compatible charger.

When charging via the power grid, you can chose between the following variants.

- Level 1 charging via a household socket.

• Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging station.
• Charging via a DC charging station.

Level 1 charging is possible via a household socket with a voltage of 120 volts.

For optimal use of the energy from the power mains, charging at a charging station, for instance BMW Wallbox, is recommended.

Charge current

General information

The charge current strength is indicated in amperes.

The vehicle cannot automatically detect the maximum permissible charge current strength of the power grid during charging via a household socket or charging station.

Level 1 charging

Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your own household socket, or at other household sockets, the permitted charge current strength must be determined by a qualified electrician, for example.

The charge current strength for Level 1 charging, refer to page 224, can be adjusted in the vehicle in three levels.

At delivery, the charge current for Level 1 charging is set to the lowest level.

Depending on the country-specific version, one of several ampere ratings is printed on the Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rating is the limit which must be adhered to for the vehicle if the charge current is set to the highest level. Depending on the charging cable, the charge current strength may vary when lower levels are set.

Overview

Imprint on the charging cable Charge current setting

	"Max." "Reduced" "Low"
6 A 6 A 6 A 6 A
8 A 8 A 6 A 6 A
10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6 A
12 A 12 A 9 A 6 A
15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A

Depending on the charge current setting, the charging duration changes.

Safety information

Warning

Improper working with electrical current can lead to an electric shock due to high voltages or high currents. There is a risk of fire or danger to life. Observe the general safety regulations when working with electrical current.

Warning

A faulty and incorrectly designed charging device at the charging location can cause damage to the vehicle and overload the power mains at the charging location. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that, prior to your first use of a charging location, you have the compatibility of the following components confirmed:

- Charging cable.

- Charging station.

– Household socket and connected circuits.

Warning

Damaged or worn charging devices, for instance worn contacts, can heat up. There is a risk of fire. Only use charging devices that are in good condition.

Warning

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. High voltage is present at the charging connection. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that work on the charging connection, for instance cleaning, be performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Charging cable

General information

Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charging cable or the permanently installed charging cable of a charging station to charge the vehicle.

Different charging cables can be required depending on the country.

Safety information

Warning

Non-compatible charging cables or unsuitable charging stations can heat up and cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of fire. Use charging cables or charging stations for charging that are suitable for the respective vehicle type.

A dealer's service center will be glad to provide information about suitable charging cables.

Warning

Improper use of the charging cable can prevent charging and lead to damage, for instance cable fire. There is a risk of fire. Use the charging cable only for charging the vehicle, and do not extend it using cables or adapters.

Warning

Damaged charging cables can heat up or lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Use undamaged charging cables only.

Level 1 charging cable

The vehicle is supplied with a Level 1 charging cable.

Level 1 charging cables can be used to charge the vehicle from grounded household sockets. Charging at household socket connections is performed with alternating current.

When a Level 1 charging cable is used, the efficiency values may differ from those stated on the energy label.

Level 2 charging cable

The Level 2 charging cable makes it possible to quickly recharge at sockets of designated Level 2 charging stations using a special plug. Charging is performed with alternating current at designated Level 2 charging stations. The charging process can be completed faster than at household sockets.

A charge current strength of up to maximum 16 A is possible.

The charging cable may be permanently installed at the charging station.

DC charging cable

The DC charging cable that is permanently installed at the charging station makes it possible to charge at DC charging stations. Charging is performed with direct current at designated DC charging stations. At the higher capacity current connection of a DC charger station the charging time is significantly lower than with a household socket or a Level 2 charging station.

During charging at a DC charging station, an indication in the instrument cluster, refer to page 225, is displayed.

The DC charging cable is also referred to as Level 3 DC charging cable.

Storage

Close-up of a plastic bag placed inside a vehicle door frame (no visible text or symbols)

The Level 1 charging cable is located in a bag in the cargo area.

Store charging cable again in the bag after use. Attach the bag to the designated eyelet.

If required, store the charging cable with the installed plug cover to prevent moisture in the charging cable plug.

Connecting

Charging socket flap

Close-up of a car's front wheel with a circular badge showing the number 2 (no visible text or symbols)

The charging socket flap is located on the right side of the vehicle.

Always keep charging socket clean and un-obstructed.

Keep the charging socket flap closed when the charging socket is not used.

Connecting the charging cable

To connect, engage selector lever position P, deactivate drive-ready state, and unlock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if needed.

1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow. The charging socket flap opens.

Close-up of a car's side panel with a circular button and a white arrow pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)

1. Remove the charging socket lid, arrow.

Close-up of a car's side window showing a white arrow pointing to the door opening, with no visible text or symbols.

1. Remove the cover of the charging cable plug, if needed.
2. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the household socket or Level 2 charging cable to the port on the charging station.
3. Insert the appropriate charging cable plug, and push it in until it engages.

When charging at a charging station, follow the instructions at the charging station.

Removing

When the charging process is active and the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is automatically locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing the cable.

When the charging process is completed, the charging cable is automatically unlocked.

If necessary, clean the area between the charging socket flap and charging socket, for instance from snow, before removing it.

1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key if it is locked.

Charging cable is unlocked.

1. Press the release button on the handle, arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable at the gripping areas.

Charging process is interrupted.

Diagram of an electric vehicle charging plug with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating charging direction

1. Remove the charging cable from the charging socket, arrow 2.
2. Put the charging socket lid back on.
3. Press on the charging socket flap until it engages.
4. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, if needed.
5. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the household socket or Level 2 charging cable from the port on the charging station as applicable.
6. Stow the charging cable.

At a charging station, insert the permanently installed charging cable in the place provided for it.

Electrical unlocking of the charging cable

Concept

In the following situations, the charging cable can be unlocked and removed electronically:

• When the vehicle is locked.
• When a charging station is defective.

Unlocking

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Settings charging current"
4. "Unlock charging cable"

Charging process

General information

At high temperatures, the high-voltage battery is initially cooled. There may be a delay before charging starts. If the high-voltage battery is discharged, cooling of the high-voltage battery may not be possible. The charging process cannot be started.

If the Level 1 charging cable is exposed to high temperatures and direct sunlight, this may interrupt the charging process. Charging will resume automatically.

The charging process may take longer under extremely low or high temperatures.

Safety information

Warning

Improper use of the power mains connection can lead to damage, for instance cable fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Use the charging cable only for charging the vehicle, and do not extend it using cables or adapters.

Warning

If the charge current strength is adjusted incorrectly, the power mains of the household socket can be overloaded and overheat. There is a risk of fire. Adjust the charge current strength to the power mains prior to charging on household sockets. With unknown power networks, set on the lowest level.

Starting the charging process

1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the parking brake, if needed.
2. For planning the charging process, refer to page 224.
3. Switch off drive-ready state.
4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the household socket or Level 2 charging cable to the port on the charging station.
5. Open the charging socket flap.
6. Connect the charging cable to the vehicle, refer to page 221.
7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.

Charging status display

Indicator light at the charging socket

Close-up of a car charging plug socket with visible internal wiring (no text or symbols)

An indicator light is located on the charging socket.

Charging status

Light Charging status

White Charging cable can be connected or removed.
Flashes orange	Charging process is being prepared.
Yellow Charging process paused.
Flashes yellow	Charging process is active.
Flashes red rapidly	Fault in the charging process.
Green Charging process is completed.

When the vehicle is locked, the indicator light goes out after some time.

When the vehicle is unlocked, the yellow indicator light flashes continuously. The other indicator lights go out after some time.

Press the button on the vehicle key to check the charging state. The charging status is indicated on the indicator light. In some cases the vehicle is locked.

Additional messages about the charging status, for instance the probable end of charging or the planned departure time, can be shown in the instrument cluster or on the Control Display.

Planning the charging process

General information

The charging process can be adapted to constraints, for instance the cost of electricity. The vehicle controls the charging process in such a way that the charging process is completed if possible at the departure time. A departure time must be set for this purpose, refer to page 225.

The following settings are available:

• Immediate charging.
• Set time window for favorable charging.
• Set the charge current for charging via a Level 1 charging cable.

If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can be made via the Central Information Display (CID). Settings for the stationary climate control and charging process are also accepted for planned departure times.

Setting the charging mode

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. Select the desired setting:

4. "Charge immediately": the charging process starts as soon as the charging cable is connected.

5. "Charge for departure time": if a departure time is set, a time window for charging with a favorable electricity rate can be set.

Setting the time window for favorable-rate

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set low cost time slot"
4. Set rate begin.
5. Set rate end.

The vehicle can also start the charging process before the selected time window begins or end it after the selected time window finishes. The starting point of the charging process is adjusted so the vehicle can be as fully charged as possible and, if applicable, its climate adjusted by the departure time.

Setting the charge current for charging via a Level 1 charging cable

Depending on the electrical mains, the vehicle must be charged with a different charge current strength, refer to page 218.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Settings charging current"
4. "Level 1 (120V)"

Settings are stored. When you change charging locations you also might need to change the setting for charging.

Set the charge current strength at other household sockets to the lowest level.

Stopping the charging process

The charging process can be stopped at any time by removing the charging cable and continued at a later time by connecting the charging cable. This enables, for instance the use of other loads on the power connection or prevents simultaneous high power from multiple loads.

For removing the charging cable, refer to page 221.

Continuing the charging process

If the charging process is interrupted, for instance through a temporary power failure, the charging process is automatically continued after the interruption.

Terminating the charging process

1. Remove the charging cable from the vehicle, refer to page 221.
2. Stow the charging cable as required.
3. Close the charging socket flap.
4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The charge state indicator light, refer to page 120, shows the charge state of the high-voltage battery in the instrument cluster, if the standby state or drive-ready state is switched on. If all bars are filled, the high-voltage battery is fully charged.

Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage system is still under high voltage.

Information regarding the charging process is shown on the charging screen.

Display Meaning

Ring orange: the charging process is being prepared.

Ring yellow animated: the charging process is active or it will start at the set time.

Ring yellow: the charging process pauses.

Ring red: fault in the charging process.

Ring green: the charging process is completed.

End of charging time or set departure time.

DC charging active on a DC charging station.

Departure time set.

Climate control activated at departure time.

Flashing: ventilation active.

Flashing: heating active.

Flashing: cooling active.

Departure time

Concept

For optimum range and climate control, the departure time can be set before parking the vehicle.

General information

With a set departure time, the vehicle is preheated or precooled during the charging process if climate control is set. Climate control output is reduced during the trip. This increases the range during electric driving.

The following settings are possible for departure time:

– Climate control for departure time.
- Planning of up to two regular departure times.

If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can be made via the Central Information Display (CID). Settings for climate control and charging process are also applied for scheduled departure times.

Climate control for departure time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Precondition for departure"

Setting the departure time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set departure time"
4. Set the desired days of the week, if needed.
5. Set the desired time.

Up to three departure times can be set.

Activating the departure time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. "Set departure time"

Set departure times are displayed.

1. For example activate "Departure time 1".

Up to two departure times can be activated.

The set departure time will be deactivated, if the departure time was ignored three times in a row.

Climate control

The following settings for vehicle air conditioning are possible:

- Activate stationary climate control immediately, refer to page 184.

The range is reduced if stationary climate control is activated without a charging cable connected.

- Planned climate control at the set departure time, refer to page 185.

If a Mode 2 charging cable is used, the high-voltage battery may not be fully charged at departure time.

Discharged high-voltage and vehicle battery

General information

In addition to the high-voltage battery, the vehicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which is required for operation of the onboard electronics.

With a discharged vehicle battery, no operation of the vehicle is possible.

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Tire inflation pressure

General information

The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure influence the following:

• The service life of the tires.
• Road safety.
• Driving comfort.
• Fuel consumption.

Safety information

Warning

A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling, such as steering and braking response. There is a risk of accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed, for instance twice a month and before a long trip.

Tire inflation pressure specifications

In the tire inflation pressure table

The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 228, contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.

To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following:

– Tire sizes of your vehicle.
- Maximum permitted driving speed.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

General information

Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation pressure increases with the tire temperature.

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire inflation pressure.

The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking using tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table

The tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold tires or tires at the same temperature as the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.:

- Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.

• If the vehicle has not moved again for at least 2 hours after a trip.
• Determine the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires.
• Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
• Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual tire inflation pressure deviates from the intended tire inflation pressure.
• Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto the tire valves.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure

For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.

For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

Tire pressures

To achieve optimum driving comfort, note the tire inflation pressure specifications in the Tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 228, and adjust as needed.

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Tire pressure values

COOPER SE

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 W	2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S
205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S	2.6 / 38 2.4 / 35
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
175/60 R 16 86 H XL M+S	2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38
185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

Tire identification marks

Tire size

205/45 R 17 84 V

205: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

84: load rating, not for ZR tires

V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Maximum tire load

Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved.

Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating - GAWR - on the certification label on the driver's door pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicle's Gross Axle Weight Rating - GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.

Speed letter

Designation Maximum speed

Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h

R: up to 106 mph/170 km/h

S up to 112 mph/180 km/h

T up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0120

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design

0120: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

Recommendation

Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Manufacture date

You can find the manufacture date of the tire on the tire's sidewall.

Designation Manufacture date

DOT ... 0120 1st week 2020

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under

controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC - Run-flat tires

Run-flat tires, refer to page 233, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread

Summer tires

Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased risk of hydroplaning.

Winter tires

Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Abstract 3D rendering of layered geometric structures with no visible text or symbols

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.

The positions of the wear indicators are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damage

General information

Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle malfunctions:

• Unusual vibrations.
• Unusual tire or running noises.
• Unusual handling such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can be caused by the following situations, for instance:

• Driving over curbs.
• Road damage.
• Tire inflation pressure too low.
• Vehicle overloading.
• Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information

Warning

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is a risk of accident. If tire damage is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer's service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced.

Warning

Tires can become damaged by driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the higher the risk of tire damage. There is a danger of accidents and property damage. If possible, avoid driving over objects or road conditions that may damage tires, or drive over them slowly and carefully.

Changing wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancing

Have mounting and tire and wheel balancing carried out by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Light-alloy rim MINI Electric Corona Spoke 2 Tone

Close-up of a car tire with four wheels and a central hub, shown against a black background (no text or symbols visible)

A balancing weight is required for wheel balancing.

The balancing weight is available as a special tool from a dealer's service center, an-

other qualified service center or repair shop.

Have wheel balancing executed exclusively by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Wheel and tire combination

General information

You can ask the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop about the correct wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for instance due to contact with the body due to tolerances despite the same official size rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type.

Warning

Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a negative impact on the vehicle's handling and on the function of a variety of systems, such as the ABS Antilock Braking System or DSC Dynamic Stability Control. There is a risk of accident. To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire

combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

Close-up of a weather tire with a star mark on the wheel (no text or symbols visible)

For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.

New tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires

Warning

Retreaded tires can have different tire casing structures. With advanced age the service life can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

The manufacturer of the vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

Winter tires

Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they usually do not provide the same level of performance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a label showing the permissible maximum speed in the field of view. The label is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

With winter tires mounted, observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed.

Changing runflat tires

For your own safety, use only runflat tires. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Rotating wheels between axles

Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs between the axles to achieve even wear. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed.

Storing tires

Tire inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Storage

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark place.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease, and solvents.

Do not leave tires in plastic bags.

Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Run-flat tires

Concept

Run-flat tires permit continued driving under restricted conditions even in the event of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.

General information

The wheels are composed of tires that are self-supporting to a limited degree.

The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire.

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Label

Close-up of a car tire with a logo on the wheel (no visible text or symbols)

The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with RSC Run-flat System Component.

Repairing a flat tire

Safety measures

• Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
• Switch on the hazard warning system.
• Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.
• Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.
• Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.
• If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Mobility System

Concept

With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside.

General information

• Follow the instructions on using the Mobility System found on the compressor and sealant container.
• Use of the Mobility System may be ineffective if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
• Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
• Do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign objects if they are visibly protruding from the tire.
• Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel.
• The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the TPM wheel electronics replaced at the next opportunity.
• The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.

Overview

Storage

The Mobility System is in a bag on the right side of the cargo area.

Sealant container

3D diagram of a coiled cable with two labeled arrows (1 and 2), no text or symbols present.

• Sealant container, arrow 1.
• Filling hose, arrow 2.

Observe use-by date on the sealant container.

Compressor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Sealant container holder
3 Tire pressure gage
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose

Safety measures

• Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
• Switch on the hazard warning system.
• Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.
• Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.
• Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.
• If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Filling the tire with sealant

Safety information

NOTICE

The compressor can overheat during extended operation. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes.

Filling

1. Shake the sealant container.

3D rendered image of a cylindrical device with an upward arrow and vertical striped pattern on the side (no text or symbols)

1. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of the sealant container. Do not kink the hose.

Simple diagram of a cylindrical device with a curved cable and a connector, no text or symbols present.

1. Slide the sealant container into the holder on the compressor housing, ensuring that it engages audibly.

Diagram showing a cable being inserted into a cylindrical device with a separate battery nearby (no text or symbols)

1. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container onto the tire valve of the non-working wheel.

Close-up of a car tire connected to a battery and cable, with a white arrow pointing to the tire component (no text or symbols visible)

1. With the compressor switched off, insert the plug into the power socket inside the vehicle.

Close-up of a car tire connected to a battery and cable, with a white arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

1. With standby state or drive-ready state switched on, switch on the compressor.

Close-up of a black cylindrical object with a white arrow pointing downward, mounted on a square base (no text or symbols visible)

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point.

Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure

Checking

1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire pressure gage.

To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealant container

1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant container from the tire valve.

2. Press the red unlocking device.

3. Remove the sealant container from the compressor.

4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached

1. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distribute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the compressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

Close-up of a car wheel connected to a small electronic device with cables, against a black background (no text or symbols visible)

1. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.

Close-up of a car tire connected to a small electronic device with a cable, showing a white arrow pointing downward (no text or symbols visible)

1. With standby state or drive-ready state switched on, switch on the compressor. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached.

2. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.

3. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.

4. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached

1. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.

Adjustment

1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

Close-up of a car tire connected to a small electronic device with cable, against a black background (no text or symbols visible)

1. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.

Close-up of a car tire connected to a small electronic device with a white arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

1. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least 2.0 bar.

2. Increase tire inflation pressure: with standby state or drive-ready state, switch on the compressor.

3. Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the button on the compressor.

4. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.

5. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
6. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 150.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 145.

Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant container of the Mobility System promptly.

Snow chains

General information

The manufacturer of the vehicle has determined certain wheels and tires to be suitable for operation on the vehicle. Mounting of snow chains on these wheels and tires is not permitted.

Safety information

Warning

With the mounting of snow chains on unsuitable tires, the snow chains can come into contact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Do not mount snow chains.

Changing wheels/tires

General information

When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel does not always need to be changed immediately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure due to a flat tire.

If needed, the tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

! DANGER

The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all safety measures are observed, there is a risk of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. When the vehicle is raised with the vehicle jack, do not lie under the vehicle and do not switch on the drive-ready state.

! DANGER

Supports such as wooden blocks under the vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle jack to bear weight. They have the potential to exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place supports under the vehicle jack.

Warning

The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is provided in order to perform a wheel change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is not designed for frequent use; for example, changing from summer to winter tires. Using the jack frequently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown.

Warning

On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-resistant surface.

Warning

The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.

Warning

When the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel housing.

Warning

A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the vehicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Securing the vehicle against rolling

General information

The vehicle manufacturer recommends to additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface

Close-up of a car tire mounted on a surface, with a metallic car wheel and a small rock nearby (no visible text or symbols)

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the wheel to be changed.

On a slight downhill gradient

Close-up of a car wheel rim and alloy wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Close-up of a car wheel rim and tire, no visible text or symbols

If you need to change a wheel on a slight downhill grade, place chocks and other suitable objects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of both the front and rear axles against the rolling direction.

Preparing the vehicle

- Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground at a safe distance from traffic.

- Switch on the hazard warning system.

- Set the parking brake.

- Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P.

- As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out-

side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

• Depending on the vehicle equipment, get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle.
• If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning light at an appropriate distance.
• Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
• Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

Side view of a car showing two white arrows pointing upward on the wheel rim (no text or symbols)

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located at the marked positions.

Jacking up the vehicle

Warning

Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the vehicle jack.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.

3D mechanical component diagram with numbered arrows indicating parts (no text or symbols present)

Mechanical linkage diagram with labeled parts (no text or symbols present)

1. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.

Close-up of a mechanical component with internal channels and mounting bracket (no visible text or symbols)

Close-up of a mechanical component with triangular blades and a lever mechanism (no visible text or symbols)

1. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.

3D rendered mechanical component with articulated arm and mounting base (no visible text or symbols)

3D rendered mechanical linkage or robotic arm against black background (no text or symbols)

1. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under load and continue turning the vehicle jack crank or lever with one hand.

2. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and at a right angle beneath the jacking point.

Two mechanical arm diagrams showing 90-degree angles, no text or symbols present

1. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and perpendicularly beneath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.

Mechanical device with 90-degree angle标注 and a curved handle (no readable text or symbols)

Mechanical robotic arm with 90-degree angle标注 (no other text or symbols)

1. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is with the entire surface on the

ground and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.

Mounting a wheel

Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two lug bolts in a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
   If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the accompanying lug bolts may have to be used as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-wise pattern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.

After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area, if necessary.
   The nonworking wheel cannot be stored under the cargo floor panel because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the nearest dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop.

Engine compartment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview

Technical diagram of a vehicle chassis with numbered components and labeled parts

1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Jump-starting, positive terminal

4 Jump-starting, negative terminal

5 Coolant reservoir

Hood

Safety information

Warning

Improperly executed work in the engine compartment can damage vehicle components and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Have work in the engine compartment performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning

The engine compartment accommodates moving components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

Warning

There are protruding parts, for instance locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.

Warning

An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of accident. Stop immediately and correctly close the hood.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the hood is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

NOTICE

When the hood is closed, it must engage on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of damage to property. Open the hood again and then close it energetically. Avoid pressing again.

Opening the hood

1. Pull lever, arrow 1. Hood is unlocked.

Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with steering wheel and gear shift buttons (no visible text or symbols)

1. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened.

Indicator/warning lights

When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed.

Closing the hood

Close-up of a car's grille and hood with a white arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols visible)

Energetically close the hood from approx. 20 in/50 cm.

The hood must engage on both sides.

Coolant

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Do not mix additives of different colors. Observe the water - additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information about suitable additives is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

With the drive system hot and the cooling system open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the drive system cooled down.

Warning

Additives are harmful and incorrect additives can damage the drive system. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin, eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives only.

NOTICE

Loss of coolant may damage the drive system. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that there is sufficient coolant in the reservoir at all times. Always have coolant added by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Coolant level

Checking

There are yellow Min and Max marks in the coolant reservoir.

1. Allow the drive system to cool down.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 244.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any

excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

Close-up of a car engine compartment showing a circular component with a white arrow pointing to it, no visible text or symbols.

1. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

2. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

max min

1. Close the lid.

When the coolant level is low, check the cooling system and add coolant. Have the cooling system checked and coolant added by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

MINI maintenance system

The maintenance system provides service notifications and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases, scopes and intervals of the maintenance system may vary according to the country version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated separately. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

! DANGER

Improperly performed work, in particular maintenance and repair on the high-voltage system, can lead to electric shock. There is a risk of injury, fire and danger to life.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that the work on the vehicle, in particular maintenance and repair, be performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Condition Based Service CBS

Concept

Sensors and special algorithms take into account the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses these to calculate the need for maintenance.

The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile.

General information

Information on service notifications, refer to page 126, can be displayed on the Control Display.

Service data in the vehicle key

Information on the service notifications is continuously stored in the vehicle key. The service center can read this data out and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle.

Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle key with which the vehicle was driven most recently.

Storage periods

Storage periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account.

Have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and changing the microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

Please consult your Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on the performance of service and maintenance work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis

General information

Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Remove any devices connected at the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.

Safety information

NOTICE

The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intricate component intended to be used in conjunction with specialized equipment to check the vehicle's primary emissions system. Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates risks of personal and property damage. Given the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for purposes of properly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Position

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehicle's emissions.

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Vehicle tool kit

Top-down view of a vehicle's front panel with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the right side under the cargo floor panel or in a bag on the right side of the cargo area.

After use, secure the bag with the onboard vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Wiper blades

Safety information

NOTICE

The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

Replacing the front wiper blades

1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.

Abstract grayscale illustration of a curved mechanical or structural component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1. Pull the wiper blade down out of the holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.

Diagram of a tool interacting with a blade, showing two labeled parts (2 and 1) against a black background, with no readable text or symbols.

1. Pull the wiper blade free from the holder of the wiper arm, arrow 2.

2. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in reverse order.

3. Fold down the wiper arm.

Replacing the rear wiper blade

1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.

3D rendering of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating rotation or force direction (no text or symbols)

1. Push the wiper blade out of the fastening by continuing to turn it all the way.

2. Insert the new wiper blade by following the steps in reverse order. The wiper blade must engage audibly.

3. Fold down the wiper arm.

Light and bulb replacement

General information

Lights and bulbs

Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you have appropriate work performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not been described here.

A spare light box is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 251.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are related to conventional lasers and are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 251.

Safety information

Lights and bulbs

Warning

Bulbs can get hot during operation. Contact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have cooled off.

Warning

Work on switched-on lighting systems can cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When working on the lighting system, switch off the lights in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufacturer's instructions.

NOTICE

Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Warning

Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the headlights or other light sources. Do not remove the LED covers.

Headlight glass

Condensation can form on the inside of the headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed.

If despite driving with the headlights switched on, increasing humidity forms, for instance water droplets in the light, have the headlights checked.

Headlight setting

The headlight adjustments can be affected by changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight adjustment was changed, have it

checked and, if necessary, corrected by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

LED front lights, bulb replacement

All lights feature LED technology.

In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

LED front fog lights

These front fog lights are made using LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Tail lights, bulb replacement

Overview

VEGETATE® 1 3 1 2 2

1 Side tail lights
2 Rear fog lights
3 License plate light
4 Center brake light

Side tail lights

1 2 3 1 4

1 Tail lights
2 Turn signals/brake lights
3 Turn signals/brake lights
4 Reversing lights

Side tail lights

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 251.

Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.

1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove left or right cover.

Close-up of a black mechanical component with a white arrow symbol on its side (no text or symbols present)

1. Turn the bulb holder for the reversing light, arrow, counterclockwise and remove it.

Close-up of a car's side profile showing internal components and a white arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

1. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.
2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

3D rendered image of a white bulb-shaped object with a dark base, against a black background (no text or symbols)

1. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

Central brake light and license plate lights

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 251.

The lights feature LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Side turn signal, bulb replacement

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 251.

5-watt bulb, WY5W.

1. Open the hood. The covers of the side turn signal lights are on the left and right next to the hinges of the hood.

Close-up of a mechanical assembly with visible components and wiring (no text or symbols)

1. Loosen the nuts of the cover by hand or with the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 250, and remove the cover.

Mechanical component with highlighted parts and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

Close-up of a car's dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

1. Replace the bulb.

2. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal.

Vehicle battery

The vehicle battery has 12 volts. The battery supplies the onboard electronics with energy.

For information about the high-voltage system, refer to page 218.

General information

The battery is maintenance-free.

More information about the battery can be requested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that are compatible with your vehicle type should be installed in your vehicle. Information on compatible vehicle batteries is available at your dealer's service center.

Register the battery to the vehicle

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you have a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has been replaced. Once the battery has been registered again, all comfort features will be available without restriction and any Check Control messages displayed which relate to comfort features will disappear.

Charging the battery

General information

For charging a discharged battery, refer to page 226.

Safety information

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.

Power failure

After a power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, for example:

• Memory function: store the positions again.
• Time: update.
• Date: update.
• Glass sunroof: initialize the system.

Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point.

Maintain the filled battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses

Safety information

Warning

Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating.

Accessing the fuses

The fuses are located in the glove compartment.

1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and intake manifold with a white arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

Information on the fuse types and locations, as well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is available on the Internet: www.mini.com/fusecard.

Where applicable, information on the fuse types and locations is also found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.

Replacing fuses

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop replace the fuses.

Breakdown assistance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Hazard warning flashers

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

The button is located above the Control Display.

The red light in the button flashes when the hazard warning flashers are activated.

Warning triangle

Top-down view of a transparent plastic container with internal compartments and a central knob (no visible text or symbols)

The warning triangle is located in the tailgate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

First-aid kit

General information

Some of the articles have a limited service life.

Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Storage

The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.

MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept

MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown.

General information

In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehicle's condition is sent to the vehicle manufacturer.

There are various ways of making contact.

• Via a Check Control message, refer to page 121.
• Calling with a mobile phone.

Requirements

• Active MINI Connected contract or equipment version with intelligent emergency call.
• Cellular network reception.
• Standby state is switched on.

Starting

If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, support is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the Roadside Assistance of the manufacture is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Teleservice Diagnosis

Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that is important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is transmitted automatically.

Teleservice Help

Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle via wireless transmission.

You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it through the Service Specialist.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Control Display is switched on.
4. Confirm Teleservice Help.

The driving ability of the vehicle can be restored for specific functions.

If this is not possible, further measures will be initiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will be informed.

Emergency Request

Intelligent emergency call

Concept

In case of an emergency, an Emergency Request can be triggered automatically by the system or manually.

General information

Only press the SOS button in an emergency. The Intelligent Assist system establishes a connection with the MINI Response Center.

For technical reasons, the Emergency Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.

Overview

Top-down view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

SOS button in the roofliner

Functional requirements

• Standby state is switched on.
• The Assist system is functional.
• If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent emergency call: the SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated.

Automatic triggering

Under certain conditions, for instance if the airbags trigger, an Emergency Request is automatically initiated immediately after an accident of corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Manual triggering

1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the button lights up green.
3. The LED is illuminated green when an Emergency Request has been initiated. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been established.
4. The LED flashes green when a connection to the MINI Response Center has been established.

The MINI Response Center then makes contact with you and takes further steps to help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, the MINI Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstances.

For this purpose, data that serves to determine the necessary rescue measures, for instance the current position of the vehicle when it can be determined, is transmitted to the MINI Response Center.

If you can no longer hear the MINI Response Center through the loudspeakers, the hands-free system, for instance, may be broken. However, the MINI Response Center may still be able to hear you.

The MINI Response Center ends the Emergency Request.

Jump-starting

General information

Have only a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop perform the jump start.

Safety information

! DANGER

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

Towing

Transporting the vehicle

General information

The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.

Safety information

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of damage to property. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

Pushing the vehicle

To remove a broken-down vehicle from the danger area, push it for a short distance at a speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 103.

Tow truck

Diagram showing four different types of car loading trucks with diagonal lines indicating speed or distance (no text or symbols present)

The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

• Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
• Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Towing other vehicles

General information

Switch on the hazard warning system, depending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window.

Safety information

Warning

If the approved gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control the vehicle's response. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.

NOTICE

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incorrectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow bar

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the following:

• Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners.
• The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.

Tow rope

Observe the following notes when using the tow rope:

• Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
• Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when fastening.
• Check the fastening of the tow fitting and tow rope in regular intervals.
• Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.
• Do not exceed a towing distance of 3 miles/5 km.
• When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

Tow fitting

General information

3D rendered image of a metallic hook-shaped tool with threaded end (no text or symbols)

The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle.

The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 250, are together in the cargo area.

Use of the tow fitting:

• Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
• Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only.
• Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
• Check the fastening of the tow fitting in regular intervals.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.

Screw thread for tow fitting

Side profile of a car's front and side panels showing dashboard and vent slots (no text or symbols visible)

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the direction of travel.

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.

What to do after an accident

Safety information

Warning

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. After an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components such as orange colored high-voltage cables or parts that are in contact with exposed high-voltage cables.

Warning

Fluids in the high-voltage battery are corrosive. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch fluids escaping from the high-voltage battery.

General information

After an accident, comply with the following safety precautions with regard to the high-voltage system:

• Secure the crash site.
• Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or firefighters of the fact that your vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage system.
• Engage selector lever position P, set the parking brake, and switch off the standby state and drive-ready state.
• Lock the vehicle after exiting.
• Do not inhale any gases escaping from the high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain a safe distance from the vehicle.

Care

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Washing the vehicle

General information

Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. High voltage is present at the charging connection. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that work on the charging connection, for instance cleaning, be performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

When washing, water can get into the open charging socket. There is a risk of damage to property. Close the charging socket flap while washing.

Steam jets or high-pressure washers

Safety information

NOTICE

When cleaning with high-pressure washers, components can be damaged due to the pressure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the operating instructions for the high-pressure washer.

Distances and temperature

• Maximum temperature: 140 °F/60 °C.
• Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
• Minimum distance from glass sunroof: 31.5 in/80 cm.
• Minimum distance from the charging socket flap: 31.5 in/80 cm.

Automatic vehicle washes

Safety information

NOTICE

Water can penetrate in the windshield area due to high-pressure washers. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not drive into high-pressure car wash systems.

NOTICE

Improper use of automatic washing systems or car washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the following instructions:

• Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.
• Do not drive through a car wash with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the chassis.
• Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.
• Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to the exterior mirrors.
• Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the rod antenna breaking off.
• Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the wiper system.

Driving into a car wash

In car washes, the vehicle must be able to roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 101.

Some car washes do not permit persons in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever po-

sition N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Driving out of a car wash

Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. For activating drive-ready state, refer to page 101.

Headlights

Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.

Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Completely remove all residues on the windows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Vehicle care products

General information

MINI recommends using vehicle care and cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care products are available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the instructions on the container.

Vehicle paint

General information

Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of your vehicle care to these influences.

Aggressive substances such as oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed immediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored.

Matte finish

Only use cleaning and care products suitable for vehicles with matte finish.

Leather care

Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently because soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface.

Upholstery material care

General information

Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Safety information

NOTICE

Open Velcro ^® fasteners on articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro ^® fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels

When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 °F/60 °C. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disc.

After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry them. The heat generated during brak-

ing dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfaces

Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with plenty of water, possibly with shampoo added, particularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components

Environmental influences can cause surface soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.

Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing vehicle care products in order to avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood parts

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood components only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components

NOTICE

Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to property. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.

Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.

Do not soak the roofliner.

Safety belts

Warning

Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the safety belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles.

Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the car's interior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensor/camera lenses

To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent.

Displays/Screens/Projection lenses

NOTICE

Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any kind can damage the surface of displays and screens. There is a risk of damage to property. Clean with a clean, anti-static microfiber cloth.

NOTICE

The surface of displays can be damaged with improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

For stubborn soiling on the projection lens of the Head-up Display, dampen the microfiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, refer to page 132.

Long idle times and long-term vehicle storage

Concept

For idle phases that last several weeks, park the vehicle with the high-voltage battery fully charged, if possible.

Do not park the vehicle for longer than 14 days if the electric range is exhausted.

With storage times of up to three months, if possible plug the vehicle into a compatible power source or park it with the high-voltage battery as fully charged as possible.

General information

Your dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months.

Safety information

NOTICE

The high-voltage battery can be damaged if left uncharged or with low charge for extended periods. There is a risk of damage to property. Before storing the vehicle for an extended period, ensure that the high-voltage battery is fully charged. During the idle period, connect the vehicle to a charging station at a compatible charging location. If necessary, the high-voltage battery will be charged automatically. Make sure that charging is carried out. Regularly check the charge state.

Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longer than four weeks with a charge state below approx. 80 %.

Technical data

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The technical data and specifications in the Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for instance due to the selected special equipment, country version or country-specific measurement method. Detailed

values can be found in the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment or country-specific measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for instance a roof an-

tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for instance due to the selected special equipment, tires, load and chassis version.

MINI Cooper SE

Width with mirrors in/mm 75.9/1,928

Width without mirrors in/mm 68/1,727

Height in/mm 56.4/1,432

Length in/mm 151.4/3,845

Wheelbase in/mm 98.2/2,495

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.1/10.7

Weights

MINI Cooper SE

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 3,913/1,775
Load lbs/kg 728/330
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,172/985
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,918/870

Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

The following chapters were updated in the printed version of the Owner's Manual after the editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:

• Notes: notes: own safety: maintenance.
• Driving tips: observe when driving: driving on a race track.
• Mobility: engine oil: topping up the engine oil.
• Mobility: preventive maintenance: MINI maintenance system.
• Mobility: preventive maintenance: Condition Based Service CBS.
• Mobility: preventive maintenance: Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Everything from A to Z

Index

A

ABS Antilock Braking System 162

Accelerator pedal positions 105

Accessories and parts 8

Accident, what to do 261

Acoustic Pedestrian Protection 106

AC quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging cable 220

Activated-charcoal filter 184

Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 152

Active Voice Recognition 44

Adjusting menu contents, Central Information Display (CID) 40

Adjustments, steering wheel 94

Advance climate control, see Stationary climate control 184

Airbags 141

Airbags, indicator and warning light 143

Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 183

Air conditioning, climate 182

Air distribution, manual 183

Air drying, see Air conditioning 182

Air flow, automatic climate control 183

Air pressure, tires 227

Air vents, see Ventilation 184

Alarm system 79

Alarm triggering 79

Alarm, unintentional 80

All-season tires, see Winter tires 233

Amazon Alexa Car Integration 46

Antifreeze, washer fluid 117

Antilock Braking System ABS 162

Anti-slip control, see DSC 162

Approach control warning with city light braking function 153

Approved axle load 269

Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Arrival time 130

Artificial engine noise, see Acoustic Pedestrian Protection 106

Ash tray 192

Assistance when driving off 165

Assistance with breakdown 256

Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

AUTO intensity 183

Automatic climate control 181

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 93

Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger airbags 143

Automatic deactivation of the high-voltage system 65

Automatic headlight control 136

Automatic locking 78

Automatic unlocking 78

Automatic vehicle wash 263

AUTO program, automatic climate control 182

AUTO program, intensity 183

Auto washing 262

Average consumption 129

Average speed 129

Axle loads, weights 269

B

Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 86

Backrest, seats 85

Band-aids, see First-aid kit 256

Battery, charge state indicator 120

Battery, disposing of 255

Battery, vehicle 254

Being towed, see Towing 259

Belts, safety belts 87

Beverage holder, cup holder 200

Bluetooth connection 53

Bottle holder, see Cup holder 200

Brake assistant 162

Brake discs, break-in 208

Brake pads, break-in 208

Braking, information 209

Breakdown assistance 256

Breakdown, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 150

Breaking in 208

Break recommendation, see Fatigue alert 159

Brightness of Control Display 50

Bulb replacement 251

Bulb replacement, front 252

Bulb replacement, rear 252

Bulb replacement, side 253

Bulbs and lights 251

Button, SOS 257

Button, Start/Stop 100

Bypassing, see Jump-starting 258

C

California Proposition 65 Warning 9

Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelligent Safety 152

Camera lenses, care 266

Camera, rearview camera 173

Can holder, see Cup holder 200

Care, displays 266

Care, light-alloy wheels 264

Care, vehicle 263

Care, washing the vehicle 262

Cargo area 201

Cargo area, adapting size 205

Cargo area, enlarging 203

Cargo area lid 74

Cargo area, loading 201

Cargo area, storage compartments 203

Cargo cover 202

Cargo position, rear seat backrest 203

Cargo, stowing and securing 201

Cargo straps 202

Carpet, care 265

CBS Condition Based Service 248

Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Center armrest 199

Center console 34

Central Information Display (CID) 36

Central Information Display (CID), see Control Display 38

Central instrument cluster, LED ring 131

Central locking system, unlocking, from inside 71

Central screen, see Control Display 38

Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 8

Changing parts 250

Changing wheels 238

Changing, wheels and tires 231

Charge state indicator of the high-voltage battery 120

Charging battery, see Vehicle charging 218

Charging cable, storing, see Storage 221

Charging screen 119

Charging, see Charging the vehicle 218

Charging, see Vehicle charging 218

Charging status, see Display of the charging status 223

Charging the vehicle 218

Charging the vehicle, see Vehicle charging 218

Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless charging tray 194

Chassis number, see Vehicle identification number 13

Check Control 121

Children, seating position 95

Children, transporting safely 95

Child restraint system 95

Child restraint system LATCH 98

Child restraint systems, mounting 96

Child seat, mounting 96

Child seats 95

Chrome parts, care 265

Cigarette lighter 192

Cleaning, displays 266

Clearance, water 209

Climate control 181

Clothes hooks 200

Coasting 106

Combination switch, see Turn signals 109

Combi switch, see Wiper system 109, 113

Comfort Access 72

Comfortentry67

Compartments in the doors 199

Compass 190

Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 53

Compressor 234

Computer, see Onboard Computer 129

Condensation on windows 184

Condensation under the vehicle 210

Condition Based Service CBS 248

Configuring driving program 165

Confirmation signal 79

Connecting device 52

Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 193

Connections 52

Consumption, see Average consumption 129

Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Contact with water, high-voltage system 65

Continued driving with a flat tire 148, 151

Control Display 38

Controller 38

Control systems, driving stability 162

Convenient closing 68

Convenient opening 67

Coolant 246

Cooling, maximum 182

Cooling system 246

Cornering light 137

Corrosion on brake discs 210

Cosmetic mirror 192

Coupling, see Pairing 52

Courtesy lights during unlocking 67

Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 68

Cruise control 167

Cruise control without distance control, see Cruise control 167

Cup holder 200

Customer service, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

D

Damage, tires 231

Dashboard 192

Data memory 10

Data protection, settings 51

Data, technical 268

Date 49

Date, display 125

Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation 157

Daytime running lights 137

DCC, see Cruise control 167

Decorative trim 192

Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 184

Deleting personal data 51

Deletion of personal data 51

Departure times, stationary climate control 185

Destination distance 130

Device list 52

Digital clock 125

Digital compass 190

Dimensions 268

Dimmable exterior mirrors 92

Dimmable interior mirror 93

Direction indicator, see Turn signals 109

Display, date 125

Display, electronic, instrument cluster 119

Display for performance and energy recovery 120

Display, GREEN Mode 214

Display, iDrive 36

Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 139

Displays 118

Displays, care 266

Displays, eDRIVE system 120

Displays, high-voltage system 120

Disposal, coolant 247

Disposal, vehicle battery 255

Distance control, see PDC 169

Distance to destination 130

Divided screen view, split screen 37

Drive display 120

Drive-off assistant 165

Drive-off assistant, see DSC 162

Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 152

Drive-ready state in detail 101

Drive-ready state, switching off 104

Drive-ready state, switching on 101

Driver Fatigue Detector 159

Driver profiles 75

Driver profiles, exporting profiles 77

Driver profiles, importing profiles 77

Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driving Modes switch 164

Driving in detail 104

Driving instructions, breaking in 208

Driving instructions, eDRIVE drive system 213

Driving mode, GREEN 214

Driving mode, GREEN Driving style analysis 216

Driving modes 164

Driving notes, general 208

Driving notes, things to remember when driving 208

Driving on racetracks 211

Driving, see Drive-ready state in detail 101

Driving stability control systems 162

Driving, Start/Stop button 100

Driving style analysis 216

Driving through water 209

Driving tip, GREEN tip 215

Driving tips 208

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 162

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 163

DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 162

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 163

E

eDRIVE drive system, driving instructions 213

eDRIVE, electric driving, see MINI eDRIVE 62

eDrive system, at a glance 0

eDRIVE system, displays 120

Electric driving 104

Electric driving, see MINI eDRIVE 62

Electric range 125

Electronic displays, instrument cluster 119

Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 162

E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Emergency Request 257

Emergency service, see MINI Roadside Assistance 256

Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 104

Energy recovery, button 106

Energy recovery, displaying 120

Energy recovery, driving stability control systems 162

Engine compartment 243

Engine compartment, working in 244

Engine noise, artificial, see Acoustic Pedestrian Protection 106

Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Entering a vehicle wash 263

Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Equipment, interior 187

Error displays, see Check Control 121

ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 162

Exchanging, wheels and tires 231

Exiting a vehicle wash 263

Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 93

Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 92

Exterior mirrors 92

Exterior mirrors, malfunction 92

External temperature display 125

External temperature warning 125

Eyes for securing cargo 202

F

Failure message, see Check Control 121

False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 80

Fan, see Air flow 183

Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 87

Fatigue alert 159

Filter, see Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter 184

Fine wood, care 265

First-aid kit 256

Fish, MINIMALISM display 216

Flat tire, changing wheels 238

Flat Tire Monitor TPM 150

Flat tire, repairing 234

Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 145

Flat tire, warning light 146, 150

Flooding, driving through 209

Floor carpet, care 265

Floor mats, care 265

Fold-away position, windshield wipers 112, 116

Foot brake 209

For Your Own Safety 8

Front airbags 141

Front fog lights 138

Front fog lights, LED, bulb replacement 252

Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deactivation 143

Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 144

Front seats 85

Fuse 255

G

Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal Remote Control 187

General driving notes 208

General settings 48

Glare shield 192

Glass sunroof, initialize the system 84

Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-roof 82

Glove compartment 198

GPS geolocation, vehicle position 49

GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

GREEN+ - program, driving dynamics 165

GREEN Mode 214

GREEN - program, driving dynamics 164

GREEN tip, driving tip 215

Gross vehicle weight, approved 269

Ground clearance 211

H

Handbrake, see Parking brake 107

Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 188

Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Hazard warning flashers 256

Head airbag 142

Headlight control, automatic 136

Headlight flasher 109

Headlight glass 252

Headlights, care 263

Head restraints and seats 85

Head restraints, front 89

Head restraints, rear 90

Head-up Display 132

Head-up Display, standard view 132

Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 201

High-beam Assistant 137

High beams 109

High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assistant 137

High-voltage battery, charge state indicator 120

High-voltage battery, discharge 214

High-voltage battery, heated 106

High-voltage battery, heavily discharged 106

High-voltage system, automatic deactivation 65

High-voltage system, contact with water 65

High-voltage system, displays 120

High-voltage system, safety 65

High-voltage system, work 65

Hills 210

Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 165

Holder for beverages 200

HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Control 187

Homepage, see Internet 6

Hood 244

Horn 32

HUD Head-up Display 132

Hydroplaning 209

I

Ice warning, see External temperature warning 125

Icy roads, see External temperature warning 125

Identification marks, tires 228

Identification number, see Vehicle identification number 13

Illuminated ring, central instrument cluster 131

Increasing the range 212

Indication of a flat tire 146, 150

Indicator and warning lights, see Check Control 121

Indicator light, see Check Control 121

Individual air distribution 183

Individual settings, see Driver profiles 75

Inductive charging of a smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 194

Inflation pressure, tires 227

Inflation pressure warning, tires 150

Information 6

Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 146

Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 150

Input, iDrive 36

Instrument cluster 118

Instrument cluster, electronic displays 119

Instrument lighting 139

Integrated key 70

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 60

Integrated Universal Remote Control 187

Intelligent emergency call 257

Intelligent Safety 152

Intended use 8

Intensity, AUTO program 183

Interior equipment 187

Interior lights 139

Interior lights during unlocking 67

Interior lights with the vehicle locked 68

Interior mirror 92

Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 93

Interior mirror, compass 190

Interior mirror, manually dimmable 93

Interior motion sensor 80

Internet site 6

Interval display, service notifications 126

Interval mode 110, 114

In the vicinity of the center console 34

In the vicinity of the roofliner 35

In the vicinity of the steering wheel 32

IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 60

J

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 240

Jam protection system, glass sunroof 84

Jam protection system, windows 81

Jump-starting 258

K

Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 72

Key, see Integrated key 70

Key, see Vehicle key 66

Knee airbag 142

L

Label on recommended tires 232

Label, runflat tires 233

Language, set on Control Display 48

Lashing eyes 202

LATCH child restraint fixing system 98

Leather care 264

LED ring, central instrument cluster 131

LEDs, light-emitting diodes 251

Letters and numbers, entering 36

Level 1 charging 224

Level 1 charging cable 220

Level 2 charging cable 220

Light 135

Light-alloy wheels, care 264

Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 251

Lighter 192

Lighting 135

Light replacement 251

Light replacement, front 252

Light replacement, rear 252

Light replacement, side 253

Lights and bulbs 251

Light switch 135

List of all messages 50

Load 202

Loading 201

Loading position 203

Location, vehicle position 49

Locking, automatic 78

Locking, from inside 71

Locking, see Opening and Closing 66

Locking, settings 78

Longer idle phases 266

Long idle times, long-term vehicle storage 266

Long-term vehicle storage 266

Low beams 135

Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assistant 137

Lower back support, mechanical 86

Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage rack 211

Lumbar support, mechanical 86

M

Maintenance 248

Maintenance requirements 248

Maintenance, service notifications 126

Maintenance system, MINI 248

Make-up mirror 192

Malfunction displays, see Check Control 121

Manual brake, see Parking brake 107

Manual control, air distribution 183

Manual control, air flow 183

Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Control 170

Manual operation, rearview camera 173

Manufacturer of the MINI 8

Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Matt paint, care 264

Maximum cooling 182

Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit Info 127

Maximum speed, winter tires 233

Measuring units 49

Mechanical key 70

Media of the Owner's Manual 60

Medical kit 256

Menu in instrument cluster 128

Menus, Central Information Display (CID) 40

Messages 50

Messages, see Check Control 121

Microfilter 184

MID - program, driving dynamics 164

MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

MINI driving modes 164

MINI eDRIVE 0

MINI Electric Corona Spoke 2 Tone 231

MINI logo projection during unlocking 67

MINI maintenance system 248

MINIMALISM analyzer 216

MINIMALISM information 216

Minimum tread, tires 230

MINI Roadside Assistance 256

Mirrors 92

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle 209

Mobile phone, connecting 52

Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assistance 256

Mobility System 234

Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Safety 8

Moisture in headlight 252

Monitor, see Control Display 38

Mounting of child restraint systems 96

MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32

Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

N

Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints front 89

Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints rear 90

Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy rims 264

New wheels and tires 231

0

OBD Onboard Diagnosis 249

Obstacle marking, rearview camera 174

Odometer 124

Onboard Computer 129

Onboard Diagnosis OBD 249

Onboard literature, printed 60

Onboard vehicle tool kit 250

On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assistance 256

Opening and Closing 66

Opening, from inside 71

Operating concept Central Information Display (CID) operating concept 36

Operating menus, Central Information Display (CID) 36

Operation via the Controller 40

Operation via touchscreen 41

Optional equipment 7

Owner's Manual, printed 60

P

Paint, car care 264

Panic alarm, see Panic mode 80

Panic mode 80

Panoramic glass sunroof 82

Parallel parking assistant 175

Park Distance Control PDC 169

Parked vehicle, condensation 210

Parked vehicle ventilation, see Stationary climate control 184

Parking aid, see PDC 169

Parking assistant 175

Parking brake 107

Parking lights 135

Parts and accessories 8

Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down, see Automatic Curb Monitor 93

Pathway lighting 136

Pathway lines, rearview camera 174

PDC Park Distance Control 169

Pedestrian Protection, acoustic 106

Performance Control 164

Performance display 120

Personal profile, see Driver profiles 75

Phone, connecting 52

Plastic, care 265

PostCrash - iBrake 160

Power failure 255

Power windows 81

Pressure, tires 227

Pressure warning, tires 150

Printed onboard literature 60

Profiles, see Driver profiles 75

Programmable memory buttons, Central Information Display (CID) 42

Protective function, glass sunroof 84

Protective function, windows 81

Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 38

Q

Quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging cable 220

R

Racetrack operation 211

Radiator fluid 246

Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Rain sensor 110, 114

Range 125

Ratchet straps 202

Rear lights 252

Rear seat backrests, folding down 203

Rearview camera 172

Rear-view mirrors, exterior 92

Rear window defroster 184

Rear window wiper, operation 112, 115

Recirculated-air filter 184

Recirculated-air mode 183

Recommended tire brands 232

Recuperation, button 106

Remaining range 125

Remote control, universal 187

Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Replacing parts 250

Replacing the battery, vehicle key 69

Replacing, wheels and tires 231

Reporting safety malfunctions 13

RES CNCL button, Cruise Control 167

Reserve warning, see Range 125

Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 146

Retreaded tires 232

Roadside parking lights 136

Rolling code hand-held transmitter 188

Roofliner 35

Roof-mounted luggage rack 211

Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflat tires 233

RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Rubber components, care 265

Runflat tires 233

S

Safe braking 209

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat 89

Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 89

Safety belts 87

Safety belts, care 265

Safety of the high-voltage system 65

Safety systems, airbags 141

Screens, care 266

Screen, see Control Display 38

Screwdriver 250

Sealant, see Mobility System 234

Search for charging stations, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Seat heating, front 87

Seating position for children 95

Seats and head restraints 85

Seats, front 85

Securing cargo 201

Selection list in instrument cluster 128

Sensors, care 266

Service and warranty 9

Service Center, see MINI Roadside Assistance 256

Service notifications, display 126

Service requirements, Condition Based Service CBS 248

Servotronic 165

SET button, Cruise Control 167

Settings, general 48

Settings, locking/unlocking 78

Settings, mirrors 92

Settings, seats and head restraints 85

Side airbag 141

Signaling, horn 32

Signals when unlocking 79

Sitting safely 85

Sizes, see Dimensions 268

Slide/tilt glass roof 82

Smartphone, connecting 52

Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Snow chains 238

Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 249

Sockets, electrical devices 193

Software update 58

SOS button 257

Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Speed, average 129

Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 127

Speed Limit Info 127

Speed warning 130

Split screen 37

SPORT program, driving dynamics 165

Stability control systems 162

Standard charging cable, see Level 1 charging cable 220

Standard charging, see Level 1 charging 224

Standard equipment 7

Standard view, Head-up Display 132

Standby state 100

Stars, MINIMALISM display 216

Start/Stop button 100

Stationary climate control 184

Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Status control display, tires 145

Status information, Central Information Display (CID) 37

Status of Owner's Manual 7

Status, vehicle 134

Steering assistance 165

Steering column adjustment 94

Steering wheel, adjusting 94

Stop function in stationary vehicle 108

Storage, charging cable 221

Storage compartments 198

Storage, tires 233

Storing the vehicle 266

Stowing and securing cargo 201

Suitable devices 53

Suitable mobile phones 53

Summer tires, tread 230

Sun visor 192

Supplementary Owner's Manuals 60

Supplementary text message 124

Switch for driving dynamics 164

Switching off, drive-ready state 104

Switching on, drive-ready state 101

Switch, see Cockpit 32

Symbols 6

T

Tailgate 74

Tailgate via vehicle key 68

Tail lights 252

Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 8

Technical data 268

Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Temperature, automatic climate control 181

Temperature display for external temperature 125

Text message, see Check Control messages 124

Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 79

Thigh support 86

Tilt alarm sensor 80

Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror, see Automatic Curb Monitor 93

Time 48

Time of arrival 130

Tire damage 231

Tire identification marks 228

Tire inflation pressure 227

Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see TPM 150

Tire pressure 227

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 145

Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 234

Tires 227

Tires, changing 231

Tire sealant, see Mobility System 234

Tires, runflat 233

Tire tread 230

Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Tools 250

Total vehicle weight 269

Touchscreen 41

Towing 259

TPM Flat Tire Monitor 150

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 145

Traction control 163

TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control, DTC 163

Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 104

Transporting children safely 95

Tread, tires 230

Trip computer 130

Triple turn signal activation 109

Trip odometer 124

Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 124

Trunk, see Cargo area 201

Turning radius lines, rearview camera 174

Turn signal, front 252

Turn signal, indicator light 123

Turn signal, side 253

Turn signals, operation 109

Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 252

U

Unintentional alarm 80

Units, see Measuring units 49

Universal remote control 187

Unlocking, automatic 78

Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 66

Unlocking, settings 78

Updates made after the editorial deadline 7

Update, software 58

Updating software 58

Upholstery care 264

USB connection 55

USB port, position in vehicle 194

Used battery, disposing of 255

Use, intended 8

Using a smartphone via voice activation 46

V

Vanity mirror 192

Vehicle battery 254

Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assistance 256

Vehicle, breaking in 208

Vehicle care 263

Vehicle care products 263

Vehicle features and options 7

Vehicle identification number 13

Vehicle jack 240

Vehicle key, additional 69

Vehicle key, loss 69

Vehicle key, malfunction 69

Vehicle key, opening/closing 66

Vehicle key, replacing the battery 69

Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 66

Vehicle paint, care 264

Vehicle position, vehicle location 49

Vehicle status 134

Vehicle wash 263

Vehicle wash, automatic 263

Vehicle, washing 262

Ventilation 184

Venting, see Stationary climate control 184

VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13

Voice activation 44

Voice command response 44

Voice recognition, see Active Voice Recognition 44

W

Warning and indicator lights, see Check Control 121

Warning displays, see Check Control 121

Warning messages, see Check Control 121

Warning triangle 256

Warranty 8

Washer fluid 117

Washer nozzles, windshield 112, 115

Washing the vehicle 262

Water, high-voltage system 65

Water on roads 209

Weights 269

Welcome lights 136

Welcome lights during unlocking 67

Wheel base, vehicle 268

Wheels 227

Wheels, changing 231

Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 145

Windows, powered 81

Windshield cleaning system 109, 113

Windshield washer fluid 117

Windshield washer nozzles 112, 115

Windshield wipers, fold-away position 112, 116

Windshield wipers, see Wiper system 109, 113

Winter storage, care 266

Winter tires, suitable tires 233

Winter tires, tread 230

Wiper blades, replacing 250

Wiper fluid 117

Wiper system 109, 113

Wireless charging of a smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 194

Wireless charging tray for smartphones 194

Wood, care 265

Word match concept, navigation 36

Work, high-voltage system 65

Wrench 250

California Proposition 65 Warning

For vehicles sold in California:

California Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-high-way motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app. Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.

Download on the App Store

GET IT ON Google Play

Street view with a pedestrian crossing under overpass, blurred background lighting and no visible text or symbols